189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008 http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 1/189 Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ....... Period 1: Review  Date :September 3rd, 2008 A. OBJECTIVE 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review so main grammar points of English 2. Knowledge: The tenses and forms of verbs, skill to make sentences ….. B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching. C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES I. WARM UP Chatting about students Telling about yourself: The teacher tell about her / himself Asks the Ss tell about themselves What did you do last summer? Did you study any thing? What do you thing of English? Why? What subjects do you like studying? What do you like doing in future? * Some requirement for the English subject: Book, notebook The number of lesson: 16, comprises of Reading, listening, speaking, writing and language focus The number of test: Oral test : 2 15- minute test : 2 45 minute test : 2 Semester test : 1 Materials for the subject: Book Notebook Exercise book Preparing for lesson: Copy write text. Doing the exercises. My name is.... I am .... years old I live in .... with my family. There are ..... people in my family. In my free time, I like..... Reading books, playing sports, chatting with friends, playing games..... Studied. Revise for examination. Yes, very much. I like it very much/ I hate it It is very difficult, boring, interesting............... I like English/ Math/ chemistry/ Physics... I want to be.............. doctor bus driver accountant teacher shop assistant farmer Listen Write Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF... Giáo án Ti ế ng Anh 10 - Nguy ễ n Th  Thanh Huy ề n Tr ườ ng THPT  Đồ ng Hói  www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 1/189

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ....... 

Period 1: Review 

 Date :September 3rd, 2008

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review so

main grammar points of English

2. Knowledge: The tenses and forms of verbs, skill to make sentences …..

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UPChatting about students

Telling about yourself:

The teacher tell about her / himself

Asks the Ss tell about themselves

What did you do last summer?

Did you study any thing?

What do you thing of English?

Why?

What subjects do you like studying?

What do you like doing in future?

* Some requirement for the English subject:

Book, notebook

The number of lesson: 16, comprises of

Reading, listening, speaking, writing and

language focus

The number of test: Oral test : 2

15- minute test : 2

45 minute test : 2

Semester test : 1

Materials for the subject:Book

Notebook

Exercise book

Preparing for lesson:

Copy write text.

Doing the exercises.

My name is....

I am .... years old

I live in .... with my family.

There are ..... people in my family.

In my free time, I like.....Reading books, playing sports, chatting with

friends, playing games.....

Studied. Revise for examination.

Yes, very much.

I like it very much/ I hate it

It is very difficult, boring, interesting...............

I like English/ Math/ chemistry/ Physics...

I want to be..............doctor

bus driver

accountant

teacher

shop assistant

farmer

ListenWrite

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 2: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 2/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

II. PRESENTATION

1. Supply correct verb tenses:

The T give the sentences, then asks the Ss to

supply correct verb tenses

1. My brother (come) home late last night. He

(not get) up yet.2. While he (do) his homework, his father

(come) home.

3. He (write) a letter to his friend now.

4. Yesterday while I (do) my homework, my

sister (read) a book.

5. He (arrive) as soon as I phone him.

6. They (learn) a lot recently.

7. Before he (leave) the office last night, he

(lock) the door carefully.

8. The president just (make) a speech.9. I (have) my fence (mend) last week.

10. It (take) me two hours (finish) that exercise

last night.

What tenses are used in the exercise?

Asks the Ss to answer the T’s question

2. Supply correct verb forms:

The T give the suggestions, , then asks the Ss

to make sentences, using correct verb forms:

1. You / mind / open / window / me?

2. It / too / dark / read a book / that room.3. He / afraid / travel / air

4. Before / afford / me / buy / that car/ my

ather / write / me / a long letter.

5. He / not admit / steal / worth necklace.

6. Why / she / usually / avoid / see / his father? 

. Not / let / he / know / my plan.

8. I / can not / imagine / fly / the Moon.

9. I / find it / dangerous / stay here / with him.

10. They / can not stand / see him day by day.

Let the Ss do their exercises, then asks some togo to the blackboard to write their sentences.

What forms are used in the exercise?

Why it is used?

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Speaking skill.

Verb tenses and forms.

Preparations for new lesson

Copy write the reading passage. Find new

words 

Read the sentences, then supply correct verb

tenses

came / has not got

was doing / cameis writing

was doing / was reading

will arrive

have learnt

left / had locked

has just made

had / mended

took / finishing

Simple present Simple past

Simple future Present perfectPast perfect

Present continuous Past continuous

Read the given information then make

sentences, paying attention to verb form: TO

infinitive, bare infinitive, gerund ...

1. Do you mind opening the window for me?

Mind + Ving

2. It is / was too dark to read a book in that

room. Too + adj + to +V

3. He is afraid of travelling by air.Prep. + Ving4. Before affording me to by the car, my father

wrote me a long letter.

Reducing sentence

5. He did not amitted of stealing the worth

necklace.

Admit of + +ing

6. Why does she usually avoid seeing his

father?

Avoid + Ving

7. Do not let him know my plan. Let + V8. I can not imagine flying to the Moon

Imagine + Ving

9. I find it dangerous to stay here with him.

Extra object + to + V

10. They can not stand seeing him day by day.

Can not stand + Ving

Write homework

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 3: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 3/189

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ....... 

Period 2: Reading 

 Date : September 3rd, 2008

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read abou

family’s everyday activities, guess the meaning in context and scan for specific information.

2. Knowledge: The simple present tense.

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UPWhat are their jobs?

Mary works at a school

John works on a farm

Linda works at a shop

Peter works in a bankMark works in a bus company

Bobby works in a hospital.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Before Reading:

What time do you usually get up?

have breakfast?

go to school?

What do you often do in the morning?

Afternoon? Evening?

Vocabulary:

go off (V) = ring

boil (V)

plough (V)

harrow (V)

plot of land (N)

fellow (Adj)

peasant (N) = farmer

pump (V)

transtplant (V)

content with (V) = to satisfy with

2. While you readThe T lets the Ps to listen to the tapes.

Asks the P to read the reading passages.

Task 1

Choose the best answer

Tell the requirement.

Who can answer?

Listen to the teacher and answer

doctor

bus driver

accountant

teachershop assistant

farmer

I usually get up at 5 o’clock

have breakfast at 6 o’clock.

go to school at 6.20

I often go to school / stay at home / do myhomework

The bomb went off in a crowded street.

I like boiled eggs

He has some plots of field.

The pump is working

Listen to the tapes.

Read the reading passage.

1. c 2. c 3. a 4. a

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguy

ễ n Th

ị Thanh Huy

ề n Tr 

ườ ng THPT

 Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 4: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 4/189

Page 5: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 5/189

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ....... 

Period 3: Speaking  Date : September 3rd, 2008

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand

important of having good schedule, have good attitude on studying for future career .2. Knowledge: The simple future tense and vocabulary in speaking about everyday activi

of students ….. B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

What subject do you study at school?

Who can write the answer?

Go to the blackboard and write them.

What time do you get up every day?

What do you do after you get up?

What time do you go to school?

Who can tell the way to telling time?

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1 The T reads the guide

Gives Example:

A: What time does Quan have a Civic

Education lesson on Monday?

B: He has it at 7.15 a.m

Or What lesson does he has at 7.15 on

Monday?

He has Civic Education lesson.

Asks the Ps to prastice in pairs.

Goes around the class to help the Ss to correctthe mistakes

Task 2

The T asks the P to look at the picture then talk

about Quan’s activities.

Notes: In the afternoon and the evening. He is

at home. What phrases are necessary?

1. Civic education 6. Liturature

2. Technology 7. History

3. Maths 8. Geography

4. Physics 9. Informatics5. Physical education 10. Biology

11. Chemistry

I get up at 5.30

I have breakfast.

I go to school at 6 o’clock.

1. Hour : minute

2. Minute … past / to …. hour

Listen to the Teacher

Read the example in pair

Practise in pairs

Ex.

A. What does Quan have on Tuesday?

B. He has Physics

Literature

Biology

Chemistry

A. What time does he have Literature?B. He has Literature at 8.05

What lesson does he have att 7.15?

He has Physics lesson

Look at the picture

Then talk about Quan’s activities.

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 6: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 6/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

get up

do homework

watch T.V

go/ cycle to stadium

play football

come backhave a bath / take a shower

have dinner

review lesson

Tense: Simple Present tense, 3rd

 person (He)

Who can talk?

Have the Ss to practise telling about Quan’s

everyday activities.

Ask some Ss to tell in front of the class.

Task 3Who can talk about your daily routine?

In the morning : Get up . Prepare for school.

At school.

In the afternoon: At home . Do homework.

Housework. Entertainment

In the evening : Review lesson. Go to bed

Have the Ss to tell about their everyday

activities.

Goes around the class to have them

Ask some Ss to tell about their everyday

activities in front of the classAsk the others to listen and give commend.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Summary:Speaking: Tell about your everyday activities Pair work

Telling about yourself* Preparing for new lesson:

Read information in listening lesson.

Study the picture

Find new words or phrases.

Practise

Tell in front of the class

At 2.00 o’clock Quan gets up after taking a

shot nap / rest. He studies his lesson / does his

homework at 2.15. He watch T.V at 16.00

Then he goes to the stadium by bicycle / hecycle to the stadium at 7.15. There he plays

football with his friends. He comes back home

at 18.30 and takes a shoew at 18.45. He has

dinner with his family at 17.00 At 20.00 he

reviews his lesson.

Prepare information to tell about your daily

activities.

Tell about your daily activities in front of the

class.

Every day I get up at 5.30. I brush my teeth

and have breakfast, then I go to school. I start

our lesson at 7.00 and I come home at 12

After having breakfast, I have a rest and get up

at 2.00. I usually do my homework for about 2hours and a half, then I help my mother do

some housework. I water the flowers and the

trees, then I have a bath . I have dinner with

my family. In the evening I watch some T.V

and I review my lesson. I usually go to bed at

10.30

Repeat the content of the lesson

Look at new lessonTake notes

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 7: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 7/189

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ....... 

Period 4: Listening  Date: September 3rd, 2

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listen about a d

of a labourer, decide T / F and answer the questions. 2. Knowledge: The simple future tense and vocabulary in speaking about everyday activi

of students ….. B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

The teacher writes the letters on the

blackboard.

Asks the Ss to write the jobs.

CCLOYRIEDV

NSSEGERPA

DOFO SALLT

II. PRESENTATION

1. Before you listen:

Activities 1

Ask the Ss to work in pairs.

Have them read and answer the questions

Activities 2

The T read the given words

Ask the Ss to repeat in chorus

Have them read individually.

2. While you listen

Task 1:

What is he doing in the pictures?

1. He is taking a man.

2. He is having breakfast.

3. He is taking two boys.

4. he is sleeping.

Look at the blackboard

Write correct words

CYCLO

DRIVERPASSENGERS

FOOD STALL

Practice in pairs

Ask and answer the questions.

1. Yes, I have

No, I haven’t.

2. It was two years agoWhen I visited my uncle in Ha Noi

3. Yes/ No

It is interesting

It is slow

It is expensive / cheap....

Listen and then number the pictures.

1. Picture e

2. Picture f

3. Picture a

4. Picture c

5. Picture b

6. Picture d

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 8: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 8/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

5. he is getting up.

6. He is cycling.

The teacher hear Mr. Lam talking and number

the pictures in correct order.

Task 2:Listen to the tape script again and decide

whether the statements are true or false.

Read the given sentences carefully to

understand them.

The first time

Can you decide?

The second time

Can you decide?

The third time

Can you decide?

After you listen:

Make questions and answer about Mr. Lam,

using the given words:

name / occupation / start work / passenger /

lunch/ rest

Ask the Ss to work in pairs

Have some pairs tell their answers in front ofthe class

Gives feedback and correct the mistakes.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Summary:

Listening: Listen everyday activities of a

cyclodriver

T / F Information

Ask and answer the questions.* Preparing for new lesson:

Read information in language focus lesson.

Study the grammar note

Find new words or phrases.

Listen and answer.

Listen to the tapes

Compare the answers with friends.

Tell the answers in front of the class.

Answers:

1. F. He lives in district 5

2. T

3. F. He takes an old man from district 5 to Ds

1.

4. F. His passengers is an old man.

5. F. He has lunch in a food stall near Ben

Thanh Market.

6. F. After lunch, he parks his cycle under a

tree and takes a short rest.

Discuss about Mr. Lam

Practise in front of the class.

1. What is his name?

His name is Mr. Lam.

2. What’s his occupation?

He is a cycle driver.3. What are his first passengers?

His first passengers are an old man and two

pupils.

4. Where does he have lunch?

He usually has lunch in a food stall.

5. What does he do after lunch?

He has a rest under a tree.

Repeat the content of the lesson

Look at new lesson

Take notes

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 9: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 9/189

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ....... 

Period 5: Writing  Date : September 3rd, 2008

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: Through a story, help students to write about an experienced has

happened in their life.

2. Knowledge: The simple past tense to write about a narrative

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE: 

Teachers Activities Students Activities

I. WARM UP

The T gives some questions.

Have you ever heard a frightening story?

Have you ever met a frightening story?

When did it happen?

Where did it happen?How did you feel then?

Can you tell about it?

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1:

Read the passage and find verbs in the past

tense.

What are the verbs?

Find the connectors of time.

What are they?Vocabulary and expressions:

stare death in the face (v)

fasten the seat belt

dip

Task 2: Group work.

Identify the events, the climax and the

conclusion of the story.

The events:

The climax:

The conclusion:

Task 3: Building up a narrative about a hotel

fire. 

Listen to the T and answer the questionsYes, I have.

Yes, I have.

It happen when I was a child.

It happened at my house/ in my school.

I felt frightened / horror/ bored ………

Last summer when I was ………………

Given verbs:

started was arrived got took off

began thought announced felt were

landed realised screamed

Then

At first

* got the plane / the plane took off / hostesses

were just beginning to serve the lunch when

the plane began to shake / plane seemed to dip

 / people screamed in panic …

* We thought we had only minutes to live.

* The pilot announced everything was all right

we landed safely. 

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 10: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 10/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

Aim:

Write a story of a hotel fire, using the

given words.

Tense: The simple past tense.

The T asks the Ps to write the story.

Vocabulary:

panic (n,v) = frighten

choke (n)

(v)

fire bridgade (n) , fireman (n)

experience(n,v)

discotheque (n)

Each pupil writes the story.

Gives the writing to friend to check and correct

the mistakes.

Can you find any mistakes?

How can you correct them?

Take the writing in turns and correct them.

The teacher looks at the pupils’ writing to give

comments.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Write the story at home after being correct by

the teacher. 

They are in panic

He is choking because of the smoke

He is a fireman

He is an experienced teacher.

Last year, I spent my summer holidays at

a weekend at a seaside hotel. The hotel was

mordern and comfortable. I had a wonderful

holiday until the fire.It was Sunday evening and everybody was

sitting in the discotheque on the ground floor

It was crowded with people. They were

dancing and singing happily.Suddenly we

smelt smoke. Then black smoke began to fill in

the room. Everybody started to screamed in

panic. People ran toward the fire exits. One

door was blocked. Many people began

coughing and choking.

Then, just as we thought we had only

minutes to live, the fire bridge arrived

Firemen fought their ways into the room and

soon everyone was safely out of the building

Luckily nobody was seriously hurt. It was the

most frightening experience in my life.

Write in a paper and give to the teacher or to afriend to correct the writing.

Write the homework

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 11: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 11/189

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......

Period 6: Language Focus  Date : September 8th, 2008

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of   the lesson, the students will be able to distinguish th

pronunciation between / i / and / i: / sound, review the use of the simple present, simple past tens

and adverbs of frequency 

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE: 

Teachers Activities Students Activities

I. WARM UP

The teacher gives some words and asks the

people to read them.

Sheep - Ship / i: , i/

these - thin / i: , i/

tea - slim / i: , i/key - swim / i: , i/

green - pink / i: , i/

Can you read the words?

Are they different?

II. PRESENTATION

I. Pronunciation

 / i: / and / i /

Task 1:

The teacher reads the words.

Are the words different?What is the difference?

Asks the P to read the words.

Corrects the mistakes.

Task 2: Pairwork.

The T reads the sentences.

1. Is he coming to the cinema?

2. We’ll meet the beginning of the film.

3. Is it an interesting film, Jim?

4. The bean and the meat are quite expensive.

5. He’s going to leave here for the GreenMountain.

6. Would you like to have meat, peas and

cheese?

II. Grammar and vocabulary

Exercise 1

Complete the blank in the passage.

Tense to use: present simple tense.

The T reads the verbs 

Read the words, note to the difference between / i: / and / i /.

 / i : / and / i /

Listen to the T

Yes, they are.

? i: / and / i /Read the words.

 / i / : / i / :

is he

we coming

meet cinema

Jim beginning

bean film

meat it

leave interesting

green expensivepea

cheese

Listen to the teacher.

Look at the sentences in the book

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 12: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 12/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

Asks the P to put the verbs in correct spaces:

Note: personal pronouns to use correct form of

simple present tense.

Exercise 2Adverbs of frequency

Place: Where is an adverb of frequency put?

Who can put adverb in correct place?

Have the Ss to use adverbs to put in correct

place.

Asks them to tell their answers in front of the

class.

Exercise 3

Tense to use: Simple past.Ask the Ss to repeat the use and form of simple

past tense

Form: S + V-ED (except irregular verbs )

S + DID NOT + V

(...) DID + S + V ?

Have the Ss to read the sentences and supply

correct form of the verbs in simple past tense

Goes around the class to help the Ss

Ask them to tell their answers in front of the

class.

Gives feedback and correct answers

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Pronunciation:

Distinguish the different between / i / and / i: /

Review of simple past tense

* Preparing for new lesson: Unit 2 

Supply correct form of the given verbs

1. is 2. fish 3. worry 4. are

5. catch 6. am 7.catch 8. go

9. give up 10. says 11. realize 12. am

After a regular verb, before auxiliary verb.

Supply adverbs in correct spaces.

He always gets up early.

She is usually late for school.

Lan often practises speaking English.

Thao is always a hard - working student.

Repeat the use and form of simple past tenseRead the sentences and supply correct form of

the verbs in simple past tense

Tell their answers in front of the class.

Expected answers:

1. was done

2. cooked

3. were

4. smelt

5. told

6. sang

7. began

8. felt

9. put out

10. crept

11. slept

12. woke

13. was

14. leapt

15. hurried

16. found

17. wound18. flowed

Write the homework

Prepare for reading lesson in unit 2

Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 13: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 13/189

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK

Period 7: Reading Date : September

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review

some main grammar points of English

2. Knowledge: The tenses and forms of verbs, skill to make sentences …..

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP 

The T give some questions, the ask the Ss to

answer them

Where do you usually go to school?

How often do you go there?

Do you go to school in the morning or in the

afternoon?

In which class are you ?

Do you like your class?

Who is your best friend?

Who is your most loved teacher?

What subject do you like best?

What is the most popular topic you often talk

about?

II. PRESENTATIONReading

Before you read:

The T asks some questions, then ask the Ss

to answer them

1. Answer the questions:

When you meet your friends, which of

the following topics do you often talk about?

2. Can you tell about these things?

Problems at school:

Teachers: 

Listen to the T then answer the questions.

I go to Dong Hoi High School.

I go to school every day.

In the morning.

I am in class 10A1.

Yes, I do.

My best friends are Minh and Nam.

Mr. Chien, the teacher of Maths.

I like Maths, Chemistry and Physics.

We usually talk about:

Sports and gamesentertainment

health problems

hobbies

holiday

work and study…..

Many students cheat in exams

Many students live far from school

The parents have to spend too much for

children at school.

Many students find difficulty in learning.(English)

Headmaster

Headmistress

Principle

Vice principle

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 14: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 14/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Students at school:

Subjects at school:

Kinds of school:

While you readAsks the P to listen to the teacher or the tape.

Asks the P to read the paragraphs.

Task 1

Complete the spaces individually.

The T looks at the students’ work and gives

comment.

Asks the P to say the answers

Task 2 Pair work

Look at the paragraphs and work in pairs:

Who is ……………….

Task 3Answer the questions:

1. Where does Phong study?

2. What subject does he study?

3. Why does he want to learn English?

4. What does Mr. Phuong say about her

teaching profession?

5. Why does Mr. Ha worry about his son’s

safety?

After you readThe subject you like best?

What you like or dislike doing at school?What you worry about at school?

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK 

Reading skill: Read about school

Write about the things in after you read.

* Preparing for new lesson:

Read information in speaking lesson.

Classmates

Schoolmates

Close friends

Friendship

1. Civic education 6. Literature2. Technology 7. History

3. Maths 8. Geography

4. Physics 9. Informatics

5. Physical education 10. Biology

11. Chemistry

Kindergarten, primary school, secondary

school, high school, college, university.

1. traffic 2. biggest

3. International language

4. Crowded 5. Worry

1. Miss Phuong 6. Phong

2. Phong 7. Phong

3. Phong 8. Miss Phuong

4. Miss Phuong 9. Mr. Hong Ha

5. Phong

He studies at Chu Van An High School.

He study many subjects such as Civiceducation, Literature, Technology, History,

Maths, Geography, Physics, Informatics,

Physical education, Biology, Chemistry

Because it is an international language.

It is a hard work, but she enjoys it because

she loves working with children.

Because his son has to ride his bicycle in

narrow and crowded streets on the way to

school.

Maths, Geography, Physics, Informatics,Biology, Chemistry

Write the homework  

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 15: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 15/189

Page 16: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 16/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

Task 3: Complete the conversation:

Practise in pairs.

Read the phrase.

Who can complete the sentences?

A: Hello, Hoa. You don’t look very happy.

……………………?

B. Hi, Nam. I feel ……………………… I‘ve got ……………………

A: Sorry to hear that.

B: Yes, that a good idea. Good bye, Nam.

A: See you later.

Asks the P to read in pairs.

Task 4

Pair work:

Make a small talk on the following topic.

1. The weather.

A. Hi, Minh. How was the weekend at thecountryside?

B. Hi, Nam. It was wonderful. I enjoyed it

very much.

A. What about the weather there?

B. It was great. It was sunny all day.

A. That sounds good. I wish I can go there

this weekend.

2. Last night program.

A. Hello, An. You look bad. What’s the

matter with you?B. Oh, I stayed up late last night?

A. Really? Why?

B. There were interesting programs.

A. What were they?

B. An interesting film and an exciting

football math.

A. Oh, Who played?

B. Chelsea VS Arsenal.

A. Great. Who played better?

B. Chelsea was. They won two to one.A. Who scored?

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK 

Speaking skill: Tell about school talks.

What is the matter with you?

awful / tired / sick.

a cold / a headache / a backache / a

toothache.You should / had better go home and have a

rest.

Practice in pairs.

A. And who scored for Arsenal?

B. Henry did.

A. What a pity. I missed it.B. There is reported match tonight at 9p.m

3. Plan for next weekend.

A. Hi, Nam. What are you going to do next

weekend?

B. Oh, I’m going camping at the beach.

A. That sounds great. Who are you going

with?

B. With my friends, of course. Would you

like to go with us?

A. Oh, I’ d like to. Are we going to takefood?

B. Yes, We prepared some bread and fruit.

A. How about drinks?

B. We haven’t got any.

A. I will buy some mineral water and some

beer.

B. That’s OK. We’ll meet tomorrow.

B. Dgorba scored the 1

st

  goal. Then Terryscored the second.

Write the homework: Make a conversation

about the topics 1 and 2

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 17: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 17/189

Unit 2 school talk

Period 9 : Listening Date : September

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: Listen to mini conservation for specific information. 2. Knowledge:  Listen and make conservations about daily topics such as weather,

study at school, travelling…B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP 

The T asks some questions

What did you do last summer?

Did you go away?

Where did you go?

How long did you stay there?

Did you enjoy it?

What did you do?

II. PRESENTATION

Before you listen:

Look at the pictures.

Picture 1.

Where are they?

What are they talking about?

Picture 2.

Where are they?

What are they talking about?

Picture 3.

Where are they?

What are they talking about? 

Listen to the T and answer the questions

I revise lessons for the exam.

Yes, after finishing the exams.

I visited my grandparents in the

countryside.I went to Ha Noi.

I spent holidays in Vung Tau.

I stayed there for a week.

Yes, I did.

I went swimming.

Went fishing.

Had sunbath.

They are at a hotel.

They are talking about the hotel.

They are talking about their journey.

They are at school.

They are talking about their school,

teachers, friends, lessons.

They are at a party.

They are talking about the food.

They are talking about music, dance…

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 18: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 18/189

Picture 4.

Where are they?

What are they talking going to do?

While you listen:

Task 1: Matching

Asks the Ps to listen and match the

conversation with the picture.

Play the tapes twice.Asks the Ps to listen for main ideas and key

words, not for specific information.

Calls some Ps to tell their answer to the

class.

Feedback and give correct answer.

Who can match the conversation with the

picture?

Task 2: Answering

Have the Ps to listen again.

Calls some Ps to tell their answer to class.Who can answer the questions?

Task 3: Conversation Completing.

The Ts has the Ps to listen again. The Ps

have to listen and complete the conversation

by filling the missing words.

Calls some Ps to tell their answer.

After you listen

Asks the Ps to tell about their problems at

school.

What problems have you met at school.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Listening: Listen

Ask and answer the questions.

* Preparing for new lesson:

Write a conversation about your trip last

summer holidays.

They are at a beach.

They are going to play soccer.

Listen to the tapes.

Give answer.

Conversation 1 -> Picture bConversation 2 -> Picture c

Conversation 3 -> Picture d

Conversation 4 -> Picture a

Listen to the tapes. Note to the main ideas of

the conversation.

1. She takes English.2. She is in Miss Lan Phuong’s class.

3. he is at a party.

4. He stays there for week.

5. No, she doesn’t. She travels alone.

Listen to the tapes and complete the

conversation.

1. it here.

2. very nice

3. big4. comfortable

5. travelling

6. no.

7. alone

8. for a drink

I got bad marks.

I find it difficult to understand lessons.

I have difficulty learning English.

I have difficulty making friends.

I came to class late.

Write homework.

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

Unit 2 school talk

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 19: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 19/189

  Period 10: Writing Date : September 

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: Have the pupils to know the way to fill some common forms,

to know the words or phrases to fill. 

2. Knowledge: The way to fill a library admission form, simple application form. 

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

The T gives some forms.

What are they?

What is the difference between English and

Vietnamese forms?

Have we changed the ways to make a form?

Have the Ss to listen and answer them.

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1:

Asks the Ps to work in pairs.

Have you ever had to fill a form?

In what occasions did you have to fill them?

What sorts of information do you have to

provide when you fill a form?

Task 2:The T asks the P to look at the column,

match A with B.

Then asks them to work in pairs: Ask and

answer the questions.

Asks the Ps to ask and answer the questions

in column B

Listen to the T and answer the questions

They are forms.

Write and fill.

Yes, we have.

Pair work.

Yes, I have.

Attending a club, a school, sending or

receiving money, ………..

First name, surname, age, occupation,

marital status, country of origin, Present

address, ….

1 - DWhat do you do?

I am a …………

2 - F

What’s your surname?

My surname is …………

3 - E

When were you born?

I was born on ………….

4 - G

Where were you born? I was born in ……5 - B

Where are you living at the moment?

I am living in ………

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 20: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 20/189

 

Read questions and answer them. Work in

pairs.

Task 3: Doing what forms ask.

Have the P to do asks:

Form ask you to do certain things.

Go around the class and helps the Ps.

Task 4: Filling in the formAsks the Ps to student the form and then fill

in it using their own information.

Call two Ps to go to the blackboard to write

their answer and comment their performance.

Correct the form.

Giving correct answer

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Writing skill:

Fill in the form, using to apply for a job, joy

a club or a course .* Preparing for new lesson:

Read information in language focus lesson.

Study the grammar note

Find new words or phrases.

6 - C

Are you married or single?

I’m married / single.

7 - A

What do you do? What’s your job?

I am a ………….

Do the asks in notebook.

NGUYỄN VĂN AN

NGUYEN VAN AN

Signature

Write correct information: I am a student

Female : v

Male : x

Sur name: Nguyen

First name: Hong Ha

Date of birth: Math 27th

, 1988

Nationality: Vietnamese

Language(s): Vietnamese, English, French

Address in your country: 20 Tran Hung Dao

Street, Dong Hoi Town

Occupation: Student

Reason for leaning English: Business /Pleasure / Exams / Others.

How many days do you want to stay at the

school? 5 hours

What date do you want to start? October

23rd

, 2006

Repeat the content of the lesson.

Write the homework

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 21: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 21/189

Unit 2 school talk

Period 11 : Language Focus Date : September

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss are able to distinguish the vowel /

 / and /a: /

Review of WH-questions and simple past tense as well asadverbs of frequency. 

2. Knowledge: Pronunciation and grammar.

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

T shows some pictures and asks questions:

P1: what is this ?P2: what is this ?

II. PRESENTATION

I. Pronunciation / / and / /

Activity 1 

- T calls Ss read again two words:

“cup and car”. T reads again and lets the Ss

repeat.

- explain the different between 2words (2sounds): / / and /a:/

Notes: the sound / / must put your tongue

back a little because it is a very short sound.

The sound /a:/ must put your tongue down

and back. It is a long sound.

Activity 2:Directs Ss listen and repeat the words in text

book.

Read one time and Ss repeat the words

Checks and corrects.Activity 3 Practice these sentences in text

book (page 29)

- Lets Ss read and find more words in these

sentences have vowels: / / and /a:/

Listen and answer these questions:

P1: It is a cup

P2: It is a car

- read again and repeat.

- listen and note.

-practice in individual

read these words

 / / /a:/

study far

subject farther

cousin marvelous

love target

wonderful guitar

- read the requirement.

read and do in pairs

practice in pairs

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 22: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 22/189

- checks and gives the keys:

 / / /a:/

1. love much 3. last

2. cousin lovely 4. are stars

5. sunny lunch 6. Martha

Charles

7. under 8. garden

II. GrammarExercise1 “Wh- questions” : who, what,

when, why, how... make questions for the following responses

(p-29)

Ex: 1 When did you come?

Just a few days ago.

Or: When did you see her ?

Asks the Ss to practice in group.

Goes around the class to check and help the

Ss if necessary.-  check and give the keys.

Exercise 2: Fill each blank with an-ing or

To +infinitive: form of verb in brackets.

- read the letter one time and explain the

meaning of some new words.

- call Ss to read again.

- let Ss work in group (4-5 Ss)

- check and give right form of verbs.

Exercise 3: complete the following sentencesusing an-ing or To +infinitive form

of the verbs in the box.

- give an example

Ex: when I am tired, I like to watch

television. It is relaxing.

- call Ss to do.

- check and give right form.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Do exercise 1,2,3 again.Learn by heart the new structures that just

learning.

Write the homework

Listen to the teacher

Write the examples

Practice in groups

2 -How long did you stay?

3- Who did you come with?

4- Where do you live?

5- Why do you like learning English?

6- What time is it now?

7- How many children do they have?

1- to hear 6- to pay

2- going 7- to do3- remembering 8- visiting

4- doing 9- seeing

5- worrying 10- hearing

1- to do 6- making

2- waiting 7- to call

3- having 8- to lend

4- to find 9- talking5- living 10- to post

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 23: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 23/189

Unit 3 people ‘s background 

Period 13: ReadingDate : September 27th, 2010

A. OBJECTIVES:

1. Educational aims:

Read about famous people in the world and find the way to study and live2. Knowledge: Lives of some famous people: Mary Curie.

3. Skill : Reading

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching. 

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

D. PROCEDURE:

Teacher’s Activities Students’  Activities

I. Warm up

Who are they?1. A famous English scientist, born in 1462.

2. A famous British naturalist, who

developed the theory of evolution by natural

selection.

3. A famous American inventors, who

invented electric light.

4. A famous French scientist, whose father

was Polish, won two Noble Prizes.

II. presentationBefore you read:

Have you ever heard of Marie Curie?What do you know about her?

While you read:

The T give the tapesAsk the Ps to listen to the tape.Vocabulary:

general education (n) comprehension study

of all subjects and skills.brilliant: (adj) clevermature(adj) fully grownharbour the dream of (ex.) keep in mind thedream of ...

Listen amd answer:

Isaac Newton

Darwin

Edison

Marie Curie

Marie Curie was born in Poland, then shecame abroad to study at university. She wontwo Noble prizes for Chemistry and forPhysics.

Listen to the tapes

You can enter university when you getgeneral education.We can cut only mature trees in the forests. 

UNIT 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 24: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 24/189

 Teacher’s Activities Students’  Activities

flying colours (ex.) leaving university with

excellent grade.

atomic weight of radium

Humanitarian wishTask 1: Matching

Ask the Ss to read the passage and match the

words or phrases in A with B

Call on some Ps to read and explain their

answer to the class.

Feedback and give correct answers

Task 2: True or False?

Have the Ps to read the reading passage

carefully and decide whether the sentences

are T or F and correct the false information,using those in the reading passage.

Call on some Ps to give their answer and

explain their answer. Correct and give

information.

Who can give the answers?

Task 3: Answering the questions:

1. She was born in Warsaw on November 7th

,

1867.

2. She was a brilliant and mature student.

After you readFind the adjective to describe M. Curie. Find

the evidence from the text to prove each of

them.

Who can find them?

1. strong willed: She harbour the dream of

scientific career, which was impossible for a

woman at that time.

2. ambitious: In spite of her difficult

situation, she worked extremely hard and

earned a degree in Physics with flying

colours.IV. homework:

Read the reading passage again, tell aboutMarie Curie . 

Write the homework

Correct answers:1. c2. e3. a4. d5. b

1. T2. F. Her dream was to become a scientist.3. T4. F. She married Pierre Curie in 18955. T

3. She worked as a private tutor to savemoney for a study tour abroad.4. She was awarded a Nobel prize inChemistry for determining the atomic weightof radium.

5. No, she wasn’t. Her real joy was “easinghuman suffering”3. hard working: She worked extremely hard4. intelligent: She earned a degree in Physicswith flying colours, got two Noble Prizes.5. Humane: Her really joy was easing humansuffering.

Read the reading passage again, tell aboutMarie Curie . 

UNIT 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 25: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 25/189

Unit 3 people ‘s background 

Period 15: ListeningDate : September 27th, 2010 

A. Objective:

1. Aims: Listening for specific information about Olympic Champions . 

2. Knowledge: The simple past tense. 

3. Skill : Listening. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about one of theOlympic Champion by using the information regarding her background and career. .

b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

d. procedure:

Teacher's Activities Students. Activities

I. Warm up

What do you know about Olympic?

Where did it start first?How often is it held?

Do you know any Olympic Champions?

Do you want to know about his / her

background?

II. presentation Before you listen

Who is the woman in the picture?

Where is she from?

Listen and repeat:

Olympic championsport teacher

teacher's diploma

love story

romantic 

While you listen 

Task 1:

Listen to the conversation between Bob and

Sally and decide whether they are T or F?

Ask the Ss to listen to the tapes. Play the

tapes several times (or read if there is not

tapes)

Call on the Ss to say their answer in front of

the class.

A sport international game.

In GreeceEvery 4 year.

Yes, .......

Yes, of course

She is Nellie Kim

She is from Russia

She is a five - time Olympic champion

Listen and repeat the words and phrases.

1. T

2. T

3. F I don't have much free time

4. T

5. F I want to be a sport teacher. 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 26: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 26/189

 Teacher's Activities Students' Activities

Task 2

Tell the Ss to read the statements carefully

and try to guess the missing words in the

blank.

Ask the Ss to listen to the tapes and fill in theblanks.

Check the tasks and ask the Ss to tell their

answer to the whole class.

Have the Ss to listen again to check their

answers.

After you listen

The T gives guide words.

1980

local school15

family

basket ball and swimming

sport teacher

teacher diploma

Make questions and answer:

1. Who is Sally?

Where was she born?

What's her nationality?

Where did she get general education?

What's her hobby?

What books does she like reading?Why is she studying at a college?

What does she want to get?

IV. homework:

Make an interview of Sally.

Listen to the tapes carefully.

Give correct answer:

1. ........ general education ...............2. ................. lives ............. family.

3. different .................. swimming

4. love stories

5. teacher's diploma

Listen again to check their answers.

Tell about Sally's background using the

words provided.

Sally is an Olympic champion. She was born

in 1980. She got a general education at local

school and when she was 15, she joined the

Star Sport Club near her house in

Manchester, where she lives with her family.

There are 5 people in her family: her parents,

two brothers and she.., She likes many other

sports such as basketball and swimming.

Beside sports, she likes reading, too.

She likes love - stories and romantic books.

In future, she wants to be a sport teacher so

now she is studying in a college to get her

teacher's diploma.

She is an Olympic champion.

In Manchester.

English.

In local school.

Reading.

Love story and romantic books.

to become a sport teacher.To get her teacher's diploma.

Write homework  

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 27: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 27/189

Unit 3 people ‘s background 

Period 16: Writing

A. Objective:

1. Educational aims: Writing a C.V about people’s background.

2. Knowledge: The simple past tense.

Write a simple C.VGet to know the format, layout and essential information of a

C.V

3. Skill : Writing a simple C.V 

b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

d. procedure:

Teacher’s Activities Students’  Activities

I. Warm upWhat are their jobs?

Mr. Grey works in

Mr. Brown

Miss Green

Mrs. Martin

Mr. Taylor

Mrs. White

Miss Davids

Mrs. Clack

Mr. LootsMiss White

What are their jobs?

II. presentation

Task 1:

Asks the Ps to read about Mr. Brown

information, then use the cues to write about

him.Check the Ss writing. Asks them to read their

work.

hospital. He is a doctor.

farm. He is a farmer.

factory. She is a worker.

school. She is a teacher.

bus company. He is a driver.

bank. She is an accountant.

planes. She is an air hostess.

travel agency. She is a tourist guide.

restaurant. He is a waiteroffice. She is an officer.

What jobs do you know?

policeman

blacksmith

carpenter

businessman

engineer

soldier

Mr Brown was born on 12th

 November, 1969

in Boston.

English 10 Unit 3, P.15 Writing

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 28: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 28/189

 Teacher’s Activities Students’  Activities

Task 2: Group work.Asks the Ss to ask and find information

about their friend’s parent to write a

paragraph about him or her.

Questions to ask:

Task 3: Write about your friend’s parent.

Name

Job.Past education

Summary:

People’s background:

Name

Date of birth

Place of birth.

Past experiences

Tenses to use: The simple past tenses.

IV. homework:

Write about Charlie Chaplin background:1889, 16th April, born in Kensington,London.1889 First appeared on stage.

He went to Kensington High School andpassed exams in English, French andMathematics. He worked in a travelagency from June 1991 to December

1998. And from 1999 to 2002 he workedas a hotel telephonist. He likes music.What is your father’s ( Your mother)name?When and where was he/ she born ?Which school did he go to?What exams did he pass?What did he do?Write about your friend’s parent.

This is Nam. He is my classmate.He lives in Dong Son with his family. Hisfather is a teacher. He was born onDecember 24th, 1965. He passed exam inRussian, Maths and physics.. He workedas a reporter from 1995 to 1998. Then hehas been a teacher in Dong Hoi HighSchool since 1999.

Lan is my friend. She lives in NamLy with her family. Her mother is a

businesswoman. She was born on March12th, 1968. She passed exams in Russian,Maths, and Literature. She has been abusinessman since 2000.

Tell the main ideas to write a C.V

1908 One of the most popular entertainersin England.

1913 Went to Hollywood. Made his firstfilm.1915 - 1925 became the most famousartist in the world1977, died in Switzerland.Write the homework

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 29: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 29/189

 

English 10 Unit 3, P. 15 Writing

Unit 3 people ‘s background 

Period 16: Langue FocusDate of teaching: October 16th, 2006

A. Objective:

1. Educational aims: Distinguishing the sounds /e/ and / /

2. Knowledge: The past perfect tense.

Distinguishing the simple past and past perfect tense.

3. Skill : Distinguishing the simple past and past perfect tense. 

b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

d. procedure:

Teachers Activities Students Activities

I. Warm up

The T write some verbs on theblackboard.Ask the Ss to write the form of simplepast and past perfect of the verbs.

Verbs provided:seetakecomevisitmeetswimringsingdo

II. presentation

1. Pronunciation:

The sound /e / and / /Instruct the way to pronounce:a. /e/ : First pronounce the sound I thenopen your mouth a little more. It is a shortsound.b. / / : First pronounce the sound I then

speakbreaksteal

see - saw - seen

take - took - takencome - came - comevisit - visited - visitedmeet - met - metswim - swam - swungring - rang - rangsing - sang - sungdo - did - donespeak - spoke - spokenbreak - broke - broken

steal - stole - stolen

Listen to the TListen to the tapesPronounce the sound.Distinguish the difference between thetwo sounds.

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 30: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 30/189

open your mouth a little more. It is a shortsound.Asks the Ss to pronounce and repeat.

English 10 Unit 3, P. 16

Language FocusTeachers Activities Students Activities

Task 1: Ask the Ss to read the words,

then the sentences.

Task 2: Grammar

Review the past perfect tense:

Form

+ S + had + Past Participle

- S + had not + P.P? () Had + S + P.P

Use: To describe an action before a point

of time or before another action in thepast.EX: I had locked the door carefully beforeI left the room last night.Practice:

Exercise 1: Use the correct form of the

given verbs.

Use the past perfect, comparing withsimple past.Who can put the verbs in correct form?Call the Ss to say their answer.Ask the other to give comments Exercise 2: Use the correct form of the

given verbs, compare past perfect with

simple past.Analyze the example:

She watched T.V after she had done allher homework. She had done all her homework:Happened first She watched T.V: Happened later 

Exercise 3: Find the mistakes

Summary: Pronunciation: /e/ and / /

Read in pairs1. fat, man has >< red, pen2. handbag >< send, Helen3. Sam, said, apple >< very, expensive,then4. pans >< there shelf5. sad , cat >< Ben, bench, yellow

6. bab, mark >< never, get, French

1. had broken2. had done3. had met4. had not returned5.had ever seen6. had been

7. had left8. had moved9. had not seen10. had broken in

1. had just finished dinner/ came2. had seldom travelled / went3. went/ had already taken4. did you manage / had he gone / got

5. had just got / phoned / had been

1. climbed2. turned3. called4. heard5. had already gone

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 31: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 31/189

IV. homework: Review the use of tense.Prepare Test your self  

Write the homework

English 10 Unit 3, P. 16

Language Focus

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 32: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 32/189

Unit 3 Period 21 :TEST CORRECTION

 Date: October 11 th , 2010 

A. Content

Skills: Reading, listening, writing, grammar. 

Grammar: The Simple Past, Simple Present tenses

Present perfect tense, simple future tense Vocabulary: The vocabulary the Ss have study from lesson 1 to lesson 3

Writing : Sentences and tenses

Listening : Fill in the missing words.Information: Wh question

B. RESULT:

I. POPULAR MISTAKES

1. Tenses:

Simple present tense Negative S + do not / does not + v

Affimative: S + V(s,es)Question: WH + S + V ?

Simple past tense Negative S + did not + v

Affimative: S + V + ed

Question: WH + did + S + V ?

Present perfect tense Negative S + have / has not + P.P

Affimative: S + have / has not + P.P

Question: WH + have / has + S + P.P ?

2. Writing:S – V - O / C – ADV / Prep. + N/ NP

II. MARKS:

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 33: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 33/189

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION 

Period 21: READING

 Date:

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Reading about special education to have good opinion on

education for disable children.

2. Knowledge: Reading to have knowledge about special education. 3. Skill :  Reading 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. Warm up

The name of a school for disable children

There are 15 letters in it.

What letter do you choose?

Tha Ss tell the letter, the T says Yes or No and if ti

is yes, where it is in the box.

What is it?

II. presentation

I. Before you read

1. The things you do every day at school

Are they difficult for blind, deaf and mutechildren?

How can they do these things? 

2. Look at theBlaire Alphabet. What does the

message mean?

II. While you read Vocabulary pre-teaching:

disable(adj) = be unable/incapable of doing st

dumb(adj) = not be able to speak

proper schooling (n) enough and good study.opposition (n) = opposing ideas

make efford (v) = try, attempt

to be proud of (a) = take pride on

Ask the Ss to read the words and make questions

with them.

Listen to the teacher.

Find the word

Answer

NGUYEN DINH CHIEU

have meal

walk

prepare meal

listen to the teacher

pronounce words

raise arms

look at the blackboard

write lessons

With the help of the Blaire Alphabet

and the equiptments.

We are the world

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 34: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 34/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Task 1:

Matching the collumns:

Asks the Ss to read the passage individually.

Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the

phrase

Call some Ss tell their answer.

Gives correct answer and explain them

Task 2:

Multiple choice

Tell the S to read the passage again more carefully

and complete the answer by circling the

responding letter.

Asks Ss to explain their answers.

Feedback and gives correct answers.

Call the Ss to read the reading passage in front of

the class.How can you choose?

III. After you read

Filling gapsAsks the Ss to work in pairs.

Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the

phrase

Call some pairs tell their answer.

Gives correct answer and explain them

SUMMARY: Reading: Special education for disable

Matching

Multiple choice and filling skillsIV. HOMEWORK: 

Read the reading passage.Study words, phrases and structures used in the

passage.

1. C

2. E

3. A

4. B

5. D

Read the passage again more

carefully and complete the answer by

circling the responding letter.

Explain their answers.

Read the reading passage in front of

the class.

1. D2. B

3. A

4. C

5. D

1. disable

2. read

3. write

4. efforts5. opposition

6. time - consuming

7. Maths

8. arms

9. fingers

10. proud

Write the homework

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 35: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 35/189

Page 36: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 36/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

3. What was your timetable?

4. Can you tell me about the tests and the

examinations at your school then?

5. What about homework?

6. What part of school life didn’t you like

then?

7. What did you like best then?

8. Do you often see you classmates now?

9. Do you ever have asocciates?

2. Task 3: After you read.

Have the Ss to tell about their friend afterinterviewing her/ him.

Summary: Speaking: Ask and answer about your

friend activities at secondary school

IV. homework: 

Tell about your friends 

I went to school every day. I had four or

five lessons a day. I had to study hard.

Write the homework

We had many test and two examinations a

semester. We had to pass them to be

continued at a higher grade. So we had to

try ourselver’s best.There was too much homework to do. We

had to study hard, went to bed late and got

up erly to revise our lessons.

The teachers sometimes gave too much

exercirses. We did not have enough time to

finish them.

I liked most of the things at school: The

teachers, classmates and schoolmates. And I

liked best the school activities. I joined the

singing and sport club. We used to haveactivities at weekend. Sometimes we had a

picnic on Sunday.

Yes. Many of them now study with me in

our school, evan in My class now. Some

study at the school in the city. But few

moved to other city so I rarely meet them.

Yes, we see each another one a years, on

summer holiday. We try to get together.

Lan is my classmates. We have just made

friends since the beginning of the grade.

She went to Dong Son secondary school.

She studied many subjects such as Civic

education, Liturature,Technology, History,

Maths, Geography, Physics, Informatics,

Physical education, Biology,Chemistry. She

loved her school very much. She joined

many school activities.

Write homework. 

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 37: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 37/189

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION 

Period 23: LISTENING 

 Date:

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: To listening some specific information about a specific class

for disabled children to have good opinion on education for disabled children.2. Knowledge: Filling the gaps

True or False statements

Retell the story. 

3. Skill : Listening, Reading and guess the word meaning. 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook, Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. warm up:

Ask the Ss to find the words derived from the

following:

sorry

second

decide

able

II. presentation:

1. Before you listen:

1. Word form: The T explains the meaning of the words in the

box.

Photograph: (n) a picture or image taken by

photographer.

What is the word - class?

Photographer(n) a person who takes pictures

Photographic(adj) being to photography

Photogenic (adj) having interesting features that

are suitable for Photographing.

Who can complete the spaces?

Asks the Ss to complete the spaces.

Ask them to read the answer in front of the class.Is the answer correct? Why? Why not?

Give feedback and correct answer:

2. Listen and repeat The T ask the Ss to listen, and then read the words

Work in groups. Find the new words:

sorry: sorrow, sorrily

second: secondly, secondhand,

secondary

decide; decision, decisive, decisively

able: disabled, disability

Listen to the T.

Read the words.

Fill in the blanks

1. Photographic

2. Photography

3. Photographer

4. Photograph

5. Photogenic

Listen and repeat.

We can see the sorrow in her eyes.

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 38: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 38/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Vocabulary pre-teach

surrounding(n) Conditions, objects that make the

living environment.

sorrow(n) pain or distress by lost or disabilily.

passion: (n) great love for something.

labourer(n) person who work manually, workingclass.

deaf (a) : Partly or entirely unable to hear

mute (adj) = dumb : unable to speak.

exhibition(n) a display, a public showing.

Ask the Ss to read and make some sentences with

the words.

II. While you listen:Task1. Listen and make T or F.

Let the Ss read the statements carefully.Ask them to listen to the tapes.

Make T or F?

What is your answer?

Task 2. Gap Filling.

Have the Ss read the part of the takl carefully and

guess the meaning of the missing words.

Have the Ss to listen to the tapes and write their

answer.

Call on some Ss to read the answer alound in frontof the class.

Feedback and give correct answers:

III. After you listen:Retell the story about the Vang Trang Khuyet

Photography club

Summary:

The Vang Trang Khuyet Photography club

IV. homework: Retell the story about the Vang Trang Khuyet

Photography clubPrepare for writing: Read the task. 

They have great passion on that

perfum.

They are the children of the

labourers.

He is deaf.

The deaf can usu that equipment tohear.

Have you ever been to an exbihition?

1. T

2. F(Information not given)

3. T

4. F(The subject of their photos

about people and scenery)

5. T

1. photographic

2. 19

3. exhibition

4. 50

5. beauty

6. simple

7. peaceful

8. chickens

9. stimulated

10. escapeThe Vang Trang Khuyet

Photography club includes 19

members from many school for

disabled children. They have taken

more than 50 photos which are on

display at the exhibition room

featuring the beauty of daily life

from the eyes of disabled children.

The passion from taking photos

helped them escape from their

sorrow and estimulate them in life.

Write the homework

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 39: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 39/189

Page 40: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 40/189

Page 41: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 41/189

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION 

Period 25: LANGUAGE FOCUS 

 Date: October 25 th , 2010

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Pronunciation.

The + Adj

Used to + VWhich

2. Knowledge: Distinguish the sounds / o / and /o: /

Used to + infinitive: Habit in the past

The + Adj: Group of people as the whole

Relative pronoun: Which to refer to the whole of the earlier

clause. 

3. Skill :  Grammar uses 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. Warm up

Yes/ no questions:

Have the Ss to listen to the T and answer the

questions:

Let the Ss to tell their answers.

Did you use to cry at night?

get up early?

drink milk?be afraid of ghost?

go out without clothes?

II. presentation

I. Pronunciation:

1. Demonstrate the sound / o/ and /o:/

Instruct the way to pronoun the two sounds

What is the most different between them?

Ask the Ss to repeat some times.

2. Practice:Read the words.

Have the Ss to listen to the teacher and then repeat

them.

Ask them to read individually in front of the class. Correct the mistakes. 

Yes. I did

No, I didn’t

Yes, I did

No, I didn’t

Yes, I did.

 / o/ is a short sound

 /o:/ is a long sound

Repeat the sounds / o/ /o:/

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 42: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 42/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

II grammar and vocabulary:

Exercise 1 The + Adj

Give an example:

The young have the future in their hands.

What is young?

The young?

How is the verbs used?

Have the Ss read the words.

Let them work individually and tell their answer

in front of the class.

Feedback and give correct answer.

Exercise 2 USED TO + V

Their parents used to believe  that their children

learn anything at all.

How is USED TO + V used?

How is negative form used?

question form used?

Ask the Ss to do complete the answer.

Call on them to say their answers.

Exercise 3 Which relative pronounWhere are the children in Mr. Thuy class come

from?

What is which?

What is it used for?

How is it used?

Let the Ss to join the sentences.

Who can join?

It is an Adj

The people who are young

The + Adj -> Adj is used as a group

of people as a whole.

Plural.

2. the injured

3. the unemployed4. the sick

5. the rich / the poor

to express a pass action and state

which have no present equivalent.

S + did not + use to + v

… Did + S + use to + v ?

2. used to have

3. used to live4. used to eat

5. used to be

6. used to take

7. used to be

8. Did you used to go

They come from large and poor

family which prevent them from

having good proper schooling.

A relative pronoun

To refer to the whole of the earlierclause.

Replace the noun, pronoun

1. Sheilla couldn’t come to the party,

which was a pity.

2. Jill isn’t on the phone, which

makes it difficult to contact her.

3. Neil has passed the exams, which

is good news.

4. Our flight was delayed, which

meant we had to wait for hours at the

airport.

5. Ann offered to let me stay in her

house, which was very nice of her.

6. The street I live in is very noisy

which makes…

UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 43: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 43/189

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Period 26: READING

 Date:

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims:  Reading about computer, ubderstand the importance of

computer in modern society

2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about computer such as CPU, VDU, CD

ROMS, floppy disks …. And talk about their benefits in our modern life. 

3. Skill :  Improve reading skill through Matching and answering exercises. 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. Warm up

Ask the Ss to look at the picture and match the

pictures with the words or phrases.

Call the Ss to match.

Feedback and give correct answers.

II. presentation

1. Before you read

Vocabulary:

miraculous (adj) = wonderful, fantastic

calculate(v) calculating machine

calculator(v)

calculation(v)

lightning speed: very fast speed like the light.

storage (n)

memo(n) = memorandums

request for leave.

2. While you read

Task 1: Matching

The T reads the reading passage.

Ask the Ss to read and match the words in A

with those in B.Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the

words .

Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.

Call the Ss to match.

Feedback and give correct answers.

Listen to the teacher.

Match the pictures with the words or

phrases.

1. D

2. E

3. G

4. C

5. A

6. F

7. B

8. H

Can I borrow your calculator?

Computer can do sum with lightning speed.

Can I borrow your calculator?

Computer can do sum with lightning speed. 

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói\

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 44: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 44/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Task 2: Title for the reading passage.

Tell the Ss to read the reading passage more

carefully and choose the best title for it.

Let the Ss discuss their answer with a friend.

Encourage them to explain their answer.

Call the Ss to tell their choice.

Feedback and give correct answers.Task 3: Answering the questions:

Have the Ss work in pairs and answer the

questions using the cues:

1. What can a computer do to help us in our

daily life?

Visit?

Pay?

Read?

receive and send?

learn?

2. Why is a computer a miraculous device?

Calculating machine

electronic store

magical typewriter

personal communicatior

entertaiment.

After you read:

Tell about other use of computer in ourmordern life.

Summary: Reading about computer, a recent

achievement in our society.IV. homework: Summarize the reading passage. 

1. c

2. e

3. a

4. b

5. d

The best title:

c. What can a computer do?

1. They help us:

visit shops, offices, places of scenicbeauty.

pay bills

read newspaper

receive letters

send letter

learn foreign languages.

Because it is capable of doing anything

you ask it to do.

It can speed up the calculations, allowyou to type and print any kinds of

document, manage large collections of

data, help us t interact with other

computer and people around the world,

help us relax by playing games or listen

to music.

What computer can do.

Computer device.

Write the homework

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói\

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 45: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 45/189

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Period 27: SPEAKING

 Date:

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Speaking about computer, understand the importance of computer

in modern society. 

2. Knowledge: Talk about the uses of modern inventions in our society such as

radio, TV, fax machine, air conditioner ….

3. Skill : Speaking skill.

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP:

What is it?

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: Asking and answering questions Have Ss work in pairs: Ask and answer

questions about the uses of modern

inventions following the example:

Could you tell me what a cell phone is used

for?

Well, it is used to talk to people when you

are away from home.

Look at the pictures and answer

It is :

1. TV

2. fax machine

3. air condition

4. radio

5. electric cooker

6. fridge

7. cell phone

8. car

Listen to the teacher.

Ask and answer questions about the uses

of modern inventions following the

example:

Could you tell me what a ……………….

used for?

1. radio

2. TV

3. fax machine4. electric cooker

5. air conditioner

Well, it is used to  1. listen to news and

learn foreign languages.

2. watch football

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói\

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 46: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 46/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Task 2: Pairwork.

Kepp the Ss work in pairs and ask them to

complete the sentences by using the words in

the box.Ask the Ss to study the sentences carefully

before choosing words.

Call some Ss to read their sentences. 

Information technology is very usefull to our

lives. What does it allow us to do?

With the development of information

technology we can now:

Task 3: Ordering.

Have Ss work in group by joining two parts.

Ask them to look at the ideas in Task 2 and

then rank them in prder of importance.

Encourage them to discuss in group to give

the reason to support their ideas and persuade

the others that you are right.

Task 4: The using of information

technology. Talk about the use of information technology

: What does it allow us to do?

Summary: Speaking about information technology, such

as TV, cell phone, fax machine, ….. a recent

achievement in our society.

IV. HOMEWORK Write about the use of information

technology : What does it allow us to do?

matches and TV games shows.

3. send and receive

letter quickly.

4. cook rice and

keep rice warm.

5. keep the air cool

when it is hot and vise versa.

1. Store very large amounts of ….

2. Transmit information quickly.

3. process information ….

4. send message…

5. hold long ….

6. make use ….7. send TV …

8. receive TV …

9. design ….

Suggested answer:

1. Transmit information quickly.

2. process information ….

3. Store very large amounts of ….

4. send message…

5. hold long ….6. make use ….

7. send TV …

8. receive TV …

9. design ….

I think that the most important use of

information technology is transmit

information because it is very important to

have information at the right time in our

industrial society.

Write the homework  

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 47: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 47/189

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Period 26: READING

 Date: ......................

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Reading about computer, understand the importance of computer

in modern society2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about computer such as CPU, VDU, CD ROMS,

floppy disks …. And talk about their benefits in our modern life. 

3. Skill :  Improve reading skill through Matching and answering exercises. 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. Warm up

Ask the Ss to look at the picture and match thepictures with the words or phrases.

Call the Ss to match.

Feedback and give correct answers.

II. presentation

1. Before you read

Vocabulary:

miraculous (adj) = wonderful, fantastic

calculate(v) calculating machine

calculator(v)calculation(v)

lightning speed: very fast speed like the light.

storage (n)

memo(n) = memorandums

request for leave.

2. While you read

Task 1: Matching

The T reads the reading passage.

Ask the Ss to read and match the words in Awith those in B.

Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the

words .

Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.

Call the Ss to match.

Feedback and give correct answers. 

Listen to the teacher.

Match the pictures with the words orphrases.

1. D

2. E

3. G

4. C

5. A

6. F

7. B

8. H

Can I borrow your calculator?

Computer can do sum with lightning speed.

Can I borrow your calculator?

Computer can do sum with lightning speed. 

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 48: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 48/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Task 2: Title for the reading passage.

Tell the Ss to read the reading passage more

carefully and choose the best title for it.

Let the Ss discuss their answer with a friend.

Encourage them to explain their answer.

Call the Ss to tell their choice.Feedback and give correct answers.

Task 3: Answering the questions:

Have the Ss work in pairs and answer the

questions using the cues:

1. What can a computer do to help us in our

daily life?

Visit?

Pay?

Read?

receive and send?

learn? 

2. Why is a computer a miraculous device?

Calculating machine

electronic storemagical typewriter

personal communicatior

entertaiment.

After you read:Tell about other use of computer in our mordern

life.

Summary: Reading about computer, a recent achievement

in our society.

IV. HOMEWORK Summarize the reading passage. 

1. c

2. e

3. a

4. b

5. d

The best title:

c. What can a computer do?

1. They help us:

visit shops, offices, places of scenic

beauty.

pay bills

read newspaper

receive letters

send letter

learn foreign languages.

Because it is capable of doing anything

you ask it to do.

It can speed up the calculations, allowyou to type and print any kinds of

document, manage large collections of

data, help us t interact with other

computer and people around the world,

help us relax by playing games or listen

to music.

What computer can do.

Computer device.

Write the homework

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 49: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 49/189

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Period 27: SPEAKING

 Date: ...................... 

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Speaking about computer, understand the importance of computer

in modern society. 2. Knowledge: Talk about the uses of modern inventions in our society such as radio,

TV, fax machine, air conditioner ….

3. Skill : Speaking skill.

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

The teacher asks questions:

What is it?

II.  PRESENTATION

Speaking

Task 1: Asking and answering questions Have Ss work in pairs: Ask and answer

questions about the uses of modern

inventions following the example:

Could you tell me what a cell phone is used

for?

Well, it is used to talk to people when you

are away from home.

Task 2: Pairwork.

Kepp the Ss work in pairs and ask them to

complete the sentences by using the words in

the box.

Listen to the teacher.Answer the questions.

It is :

1. TV

2. fax machine

3. air condition

4. radio

5. electric cooker

6. fridge

7. cell phone

8. car

Listen to the teacher.

Ask and answer questions about the uses

of modern inventions following the

example:

Could you tell me what a………….

used for?

1. radio

2. TV

3. fax machine

4. electric cooker5. air conditioner

Well, it is used to:

1. listen to news and learn foreign

languages.

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 50: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 50/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Ask the Ss to study the sentences carefully

before choosing words.

Call some Ss to read their sentences. 

Information technology is very useful to

our lives. What does it allow us to do?

With the development of information

technology we can now:

Task 3: Ordering.

Have Ss work in group by joining two

parts. Ask them to look at the ideas in Task

2 and then rank them in order of

importance.

Encourage them to discuss in group to give

the reason to support their ideas and

persuade the others that you are right.

Task 4: The using of information

technology. Talk about the use of information

technology : What does it allow us to do?

Summary: Speaking about information technology,

such as TV, cell phone, fax machine, ….. a

recent achievement in our society.

IV. HOMEWORK Write about the use of information

technology : What does it allow us to do?

2. watch football matches and TV games

shows.

3. send and receive letter quickly.

4. cook rice and keep rice warm.

5. keep the air cool when it is hot and

vise versa.

1. Store very large amounts of ….

2. Transmit information quickly.

3. process information ….

4. send message…

5. hold long ….

6. make use ….

7. send TV …

8. receive TV …

9. design ….

Suggested answers:

1. Transmit information quickly.

2. process information ….

3. Store very large amounts of ….

4. send message…

5. hold long ….

6. make use ….

7. send TV …8. receive TV …

9. design ….

I think that:

The most important use of information

technology is transmit information because

it is very important to have information at

the right time in our industrial society.

Write the homework

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 51: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 51/189

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Period 28: LISTENING

 Date: ...................... 

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Listen about a story of a man who does not know how to use acomputer and under stand the importance of using computer and other achievement of

technology in our society. 

2. Knowledge: Listen to the passage, choose T or F information and complete the

spaces, then tell the story shortly.

3. Skill : Listening, T / F and gap filling. 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Tick in the column:

How often do you use these things every day?

II.  PRESENTATION

1. Before you listen:

Listen and repeat:

The T reads the words, then asks the Ss to readafter.

2. While you listen:

Task 1

Ask the Ss to read the given sentences carefully

before listening to the tapes.

Read the story several times.

Call the Ss to say their answer.

Feedback and give correct answer

Very often: Listen to the radio, use

computer, watch TV.

Sometimes: camcorder, cell phone.

Never: Fax machine.

Listen to the teacher. Read the words

or phrases.

worriedmemory

refused

excuse -> To make an excuse

VDU

headache

1. F ( He wasn’t worried )

2. T

3. T

4. F ( He understood about computer

and became the father’s teacher.)

5. F ( He did not understand the

lesson well)

6. F He made an excuse to leave the

lesson until another day. 

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 52: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 52/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Task 2: Gap filling

The T reads the text again and asks the Ss to write

the missing words.

Tell the Ss to write the exact word for the blanks.

Let the Ss to discuss their answer with friends.

Feedback and give correct answer:

3. After you listen:

Ask the Ss to work in pair and ask and answer

about the man’s story.

Guiding questions:

1. What did the man’s son buy?

2. Why did he become worried?

3. What didn’t he know?

4. What happened to the man memory?

5. What did he suggest?

Have the Ss to tell the story.

Go around to check the Ss writing.

Summary:Listen about a story of a man who does not know

how to use a computer and under stand the

importance of using computer and other

achievement of technology in our society.

Choose T or F information and complete the

spaces, then summary the story 

IV. HOMEWORK Write the story of the old man.

Listen to the T, write the correct

answer, discuss the correct words

with friend.

1. invited2. still

3. refused

4. excuse

5. anything

a computer

His secretary asked him to buy a

computer.

He did not know how to use a

computer.

He could not understand anything.

To leave the lesson to another day, in

fact he never took the lesson again.

The story is about an old man who

doesn’t know how to use a computer.

When his secretary asked to buy a

computer, he became worried

because he didn’t know how to use

it. He asked his son to teach him but

he didn’t’ understand anything and

he suggested leaving the lesson until

another day. In fact he never took

lesson on computer at all.

Write the homework

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 53: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 53/189

Page 54: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 54/189

Page 55: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 55/189

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Period 30: LANGUAGE FOCUS

 Date: ...................... 

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Pronunciation.

The present perfect and present perfect passive appropriately.

2. Knowledge: Distinguish the sounds / u / and / u: /

The present perfect : S + has + P.P

Present perfect passive : S + has + been + P.P

3. Skills : Pronunciation and the use of the present perfect and present perfect passive

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

III.  WARM UP

Who / which / where

Put the words in correct column:

park / school / student / teacher/ farmer /

nurse/ doctor / scholarship/ pupil / summer / bank

 / market / museum / dictionary / board

IV.  PRESENTATION

I. Pronunciation

1. Demonstrate the sound / u/ and /u:/

Instruct the way to pronoun the two soundsWhat is the most different between them?

Ask the Ss to repeat some times.

2. Practice:

Read the words.

Have the Ss to listen to the teacher and then repeat

them.

Ask them to read individually in front of the class.

2. Grammar and vocabulary

a. The present perfect:The use: Express an action which began

in the past and still continues.

Adv: Since / for

Since : the time to begin an action.

For : A period of time. 

Who:

student / teacher/ farmer /

nurse/ doctor /

Which

scholarship/ dictionary / board

Where

park / school / bank / market /

museum

 / u/ is a short sound /u:/ is a long sound

Repeat the sounds

 / u/ /u:/

Listen to the teacher.

Practise

Listen to the teacher.Repeat the rules and structure.

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 56: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 56/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

* Structure: + S + have / has + P.P

- S + have not / has not + P.P

? (…) Have / has + S + P.P

Have the Ss to do the exercises.

Call them to tell their answers.

Feedback and give correct answers.b. The present perfect passive:

* Structure: + S + have / has + been + P.P

Ex: A new brigde has been built across the river.

Ask the Ss to work in pairs and do exercises.

Call them to write their answers on the

blackboard.

Feedback and give correct answers.

c. Relative clauses 

Filling the blanks using Who / which / that.

Who and which can be used in place of noun

subject and object. When they refer to the subject,

they can non normally be omitted.

Who refers to people.Which refers to thing.

That refers to both man and thing.

Ask the Ss to fill and call them to tell their

answers.

Give feedback and correct answer.

Summary: Present perfect and Present perfect

passive.

Relative clause. IV. HOMEWORK: 

Review the sentences in the notebook.Prepare for new lesson: Read the reading passage. 

1. Tan has opened the door.

He has turned on the TV

He has tidied the house

He has cleaned the door

He has turned on the light

He has laid two bottles of wateron the table.

1. A new hospital has been built in

our city.

2. Another man - made satellite has

been sent up into space.

3. More and more trees has been cut

down for wood by farmer.

4. Thousand of animals have been

killed ..

5. About hundred building and

houses have been destroyed.

6. More than 50 films have been

shown

7. Their hands have been washed and

dried …

8. Another book has been read

9. Some ink has been split.

10. She has bee shown..

1. Which2. Which

3. Which

4. Who

5. Who

6. Who

7. Who(m)

8. Which

9. Which

10. Who

Write the homework

UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 57: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 57/189

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Period 31: READING 

 Date: ......................

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Read a letter about famous places in Viet Nam such asHuong Pagoda, Thay Pagoda in the North Viet Nam. 

2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about famous places. Improve reading

comprehension skill by doing Multiple choice and answering the questions in the

reading.

3. Skill : Reading 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 

STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIESI.  WARM UP

Asks questions.

Tell about famous places in Viet Nam. Where

are they?

II.  PRESENTATION

I. Before you read:

a. Matching:Match the photos with the pictures.

b. Vocabulary: Ask the Ss to close the book.

Have them combine the verb in A with its

object in B.

To have an excursion

to make our love to them

to make a two - day trip

to stay some days off

to give the night awayfrom home

II. While you read:

a. Task 1: Multiple Choice

Ask the Ss to read the letter and choose the

best answer A, B, C or D to complete the

sentences.

Listen to the teacher.

Answer the questions.

Sapa resort Thien Mu Pagode

Huong river Huong Pagoda

Thay Pagoda One Pillar Pagoda

Mi Son Pagoda Da Lat City

Nhat Le Beach Nha Trang Beach

Phong Nha Cave Ha Long Bay

1. D

2. B

3. A

4. C

To have some days off

to make a two - day trip

to make an excursion

to stay the night away from hometo give our love to them

Listen to the teacher

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 58: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 58/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.

Feedback and give correct answers.

b Task 2: Answering the questions

Ask the Ss to work in pairs.Call some pairs to act out the activity in front

of the class.

Feedback and give correct answers.

III. After you read:

Summary completion:Have the Ss work individually and fill each of

the blank with a suitable group of words from

the text.

Ask the Ss t read the text carefully before

doing the task.

Have them to compare their answer with theother.

Call on some Ss to read their answer.

Give feedback and correct answer.

Summary: Reading about some famous places in VN.

III. HOMEWORK

Summarize the reading in homework note

book  

Listen to the teacher.

Complete the answer.

1. C

2. D

3. C

Suggested answers:

1. They are going on the trip when they

have some days off after the 1st term.

2. They are going to visit some caves

because they want to understand their

geography lesson better and many of

them have never been inside of the

caves.

3. It is over 20 km.

4. They are going to make a two daytrip and have a night campfire. They are

bringing their own foot and sharing

buses with other class to make the trip

cheap.

5. Lan is anxious about her parents

permission. They may not want to let

her stay the night away from home.

1. is going to

2. some caves

3. want to see

4. have learn

their trip

6. only problem

7. to persuade

8. her classmates

Write the homework

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 59: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 59/189

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Period 32: SPEAKING 

 Date: ...................... 

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: Talk about a boat trip abroad 

2. Knowledge: Talk about the seat plan on a boat trip on Lake Michigan inChicago.

3. Skill : Speaking 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Ask the students to:

Find the words about famous places to visit 

II.  PRESENTATION

Speaking

Task 1:

Vocabulary:

sundeck (n)get sun burnt(adj)

travel sickness (n)

air - conditioned (adj)

refreshment (n)

occupied (adj)

Ask the Ss to study the sentences carefully

Call some Ss to read their sentences. 

Information very useful for us to arrange the seats

for the Ss.

T sets up the situation

Asks Ss to list suitable seats corresponding to the

demands of each information in Task 1

Ex:

+are in sundeck (Tim): seats 1,6

Listen to the teacher.

Find the places

MountainRiver

Lake

Cave

Beach

village

Pagoda

Forest

……..

Listen to the teacher.

Read the words

Read the given sentences.

Read their answers 

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 60: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 60/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

+can help give a good view

seats 16,29,34

Task 2:

Have Ss work in group and read the sentences

and decide the best seat for each person, usingthe information in task 1.

Some useful structures:

I don’t think so.

To be suitable for…

Why? Why not?

Why do you think so?

What ‘s your idea?

Encourage them to discuss in group to give

the reason to support their ideas and

persuade the others that you are right.

T invites some pairs to present the

conservation before the class

the rest of the class give comment.

T gives comments.

T asks Ss to look at the seat plan and find

suitable seats for them. Give reasons.

Task 3:Asks the Ss to choose their own seat and tell

the reason

III. HOMEWORKWrite a paragraph to choose their own seat

and tell the reason

do as required as quickly as possible

basing on the examples given.

-say out loud the seats they have found.

-look at the board, determine suitable

seat for each participant.

-work in groups of 4 to conduct a

conservation as required, using

examples in the book, useful

expressions and model conservation on

the board as cues.

I think Mary should....

she’d better....

It’s not a good idea because...seat 34 would be better...

Ss present their conservation before the

class.

some Ss give comment

Note down if necessary.

Tell the class the seats they like without

looking back at the information in the

book.

Expected conservation:A: now let’s begin with Mrs Andrew

which seat seems suitable for her?

B: I think she should sit in seat 12.

From here, she can see all the ss.

A: But look! It’s in the sundeck and she

does not like it. What about seat 34?

: Ok I think she will like it, so seat 34 is

or Mrs Andrew.

1.  I think I should sit in section B

because I do not like air –

condition.

2. I think I should sit in section A

because I like air – condition.

3. I think I should sit in section B

because I like sundeck.

Write the homework  

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 61: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 61/189

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Period 33: LISTENING 

 Date: November 10th, 2010

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: To get ss listen to the talking about a picnic to Botanical

Garden and do the given tasks: ordering pictures, filling in the gaps, answeringcomprehensive questions. 

2. Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to master the main content

of the listening text (time, place, activities of a weekend picnic, ect) and rephrase it into

speaking or writing form. Know how to make plan for a weekend picnic.

3. Skill : Speaking 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIESI.  WARM UP

I have a word containing 6 letters. It means

pleasure party including outdoor meal.

What word is it?

II.  PRESENTATION

1. Before listening:

*Ask Ps to answer the questions:

* Guide Ps to repeat these words.

2. While listening: OrderingTask 1:  Ask Ps to study the picture

carefully.

Ask some questions about the pictures.

a, What do you see in this picture?

b, Where are the people?

c, What are they doing ?

d, What are they doing ?

e, Where are they standing ?

f, What do you see in the picture ?

PICNIC 

Suggested answers:

1. Yes, I do.

2. At weekends or summer holiday.

3. To have a good time after hard work.

- Listen and repeat:

1. glorious (adj) : beautiful, shining

2.spacious (adj ) :large3.destination ( n) : a place to which a person

is going to

4.left – over ( n ) the rest : thøc ¨n thõa

5. Botanical Garden : V-ên B¸ch Th¶o

- A river and some trees.

- They are on the bus.

- They are taking photographs.

- They are taking a rest after meal.

- They are standing in front of the schoolgate.

- One boy is playing the guitar, some are

dancing.

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 62: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 62/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

-Ask Ps to listen and number the pictures.

Ask the Ss to look at the pictures carefully.

Call the Ss to say their answer.

Feedback and give correct answer

Task 2: Gap – fillingAsk Ps to guess the words to fill.

The t reads the text again and asks the Ss to

write the missing words.

Tell the Ss to write the exact word for the

blanks.

Let the Ss to discuss their answer with

friends.

Feedback and give correct answer:

Task 3: Answering questions:

Ask Ps to guess the answer, then compare

the answers.

3. After listening:Ask Ps to work in group and map out

the plan for the picnic this weekend.

When to go?

Where to go?

How long to go?

What to take along?

III.  HOMEWORK:

Prepare for new lesson: Writing 

Suggested answers:1. a 2. e

3. b 4. c

5. f 6.d

Listen to the T write the correct answer,

discuss the correct words with friend.Listen and fill

Suggested answers:

1. was a few weeks ago

2. to pay a visit

3. at the school gate

4. a short tour

5. playing some more

Work in group.

Suggested answers:

1. The weather was very nice.2. Yes, it was.

3. The garden was beautiful.

4. They could sleep soundly because it

was so peaceful and quiet in the garden.

5. They took pictures, played games,

talked, sang and dance.

Discuss and make a decision:

Nhat Le Beach

Phong Nha Cave

MountainThe countryside

Next Sunday

At Christmas

Next summer holiday

For a day

For two days

Only the morning / afternoon

Food: bread

noodle

canned food

butter …..

Drinks: mineral warder

milk

fruit juice

Write the homework  

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 63: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 63/189

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Period 34: WRITING

 Date: ......................

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a

confirmation letter responding to a request and an invitation.

2. Knowledge : Request – Can you go shopping with me to buy the things

we need for the trip?

Confirm –Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything you

need for the trip.

3. Skill: Writing a confirmation letter.

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Which words you can use with

LETTER?

What are they?

II.  PRESENTATION

Explain the definition of request andconfirmation letter.

Request is the letter that asks for

information or help.

Confirmation is the letter that responds

to the request. It confirms whether the

help is provided or not.

Task 1:Finding request and

confirmation Ask the Ps to read the two letters below

and

find request in Nga’s letter and confirma-

tion in Hoa’s letter. 

business

friendly

invitation

apology LETTER 

thank you

complaint

love

get-well

confirmation

Suggested answers:Request: Can you go shopping with me to

buy the things we need for the trip?

Confirmation: Certainly. I will help you

to prepare everything you need for the trip.

Get the request clearly :

* Lan asks you to buy some fruits andbring them to her house

*Minh wants to borrow you a book

about wildlife.

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 64: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 64/189

 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Task 2: Writing confirmation

Ask Ps to read the situations carefully and

find the request in both of them.

Tells Ss to choose one of these situations to

write a confirmation letter responding to each

of them

Ask Ps to work individually.

1. Congratulation on birthday

Confirmation

signature

Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with a

friend.

Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.

2. Tell if you can give the book

Confirmation

Suggest changing time to meet

Signature.

Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.

Call some Ps to write on the board. Give

feedback.

Summary:

Write confirmation letter responding to arequest and an invitation.

III. HOMEWORK

Write instructions.

1) Dear Lan,

Firstly I would like to

congratulate you on your 15th

 birthday.

I’m glad to join your birthday party next

Sunday. Of course, I will help you to

prepare everything for the party. I will

buy all the things you need and bring

them to your house an hour before the

party.

See you later.

Yours,

Mai

2)

Dear Minh,

I am happy to tell you that the

book you want is available. You can use

it for a week. But I will not be at home

this Saturday. Can you come on

Sunday? I will wait for you all day.

See you then,

Yours

Nam

Dear Hoa,

I have received your letter which

requests the details of the application

form for the video library. I enclose

here the full form and you are asked to

fill out before send back to us. You can

send us before Christmas and remember

to attach a photo on the first page of theform.

I am looking forward to hearing from

you.

Your truly,

Director 

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 65: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 65/189

 

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

Period 35: LANGUAGE FOCUS 

 Date: ...................... 

A. AIMS:

1. Educational aims : By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the present

progressive and be going to in situations appropriately.

2. Knowledge : -/ ə / and / ə: /

- Present progressive with a future meaning and be going to 

3. Skill: Listening, using the correct tenses. 

B. METHODS: Communicative approach

C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures

D . PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

A B

1. stay a. some souvenirs

2. go b. some photos

3. send c. postcards

4. take d. at home

5. buy e. for a picnic

II.  PRESENTATION

I Pronunciation:Demonstrate the sounds / ə / and / ə : / by

pronouncing them clearly and slowly.

 / ə : / first pronounce the sound / ə / then put

your tongue forward and up a little. It’s a long

sound.

 / ə / first pronounce the sound / ə : / but

make it short. It’s a short sound.

Ask Ps to practice these sentences.

* Barbara’s, camera

was

* water

thirsty, Nurse

1- d 2 – e

3- c 4 – b

5 - a

Listen to these sound

 / ə /

teacher, other

together, pagoda

about , today

1. about, pagoda

2. father, German

 / ə : /

bird , termwork , shirt

church , early

excursion

her, learning, German

birds, returned, earlier

UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 66: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 66/189

Page 67: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 67/189

Unit 7 THE mass media

Period 38 : ReadingDate : ……………………..

A. Objective:

1. Educational aims: Read about TV program schedules.

2. Knowledge: Be update with name of some popular TV programmes such

as Quiz Show, Portrait of life ………

Be able to tell about the Ss’ favourite programmes.3. Skill : Read and speak about T.V programmes and favourite programmes.

Finding the definitions, do T/F exercises and answer the questions

b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

d. procedure:

Teachers Activities Students Activities

I. Warm up

What forms of mass media do you know?

What are they?

II. presentation

1. Before you read

Pairwork:

1. When do you often watch T.V?

2. How many channels are their on our

national T.V?

What are they?

3. How many hour per week do you watch

T.V?

Has the Ss to listen to the tapes and fid the

new words.

Vocabulary pre - teach

Population and Development

T.V series

Folk songs

New headlines

Weather Forecast

Quiz Show

Portrait of life

Documentary

Radio

TelevisionNewspaper

Radio

Book

Internet …….

They are MASS MEDIA

At night.

After I finish my homework.In the evening / afternoon.

VTV1: Combination of Politics,

Economics and entertainment.

VTV2: Science and Education

VTV3: Entertainment

VTV4: For the overseas

VTV5: For the Ethnic minority groups

Ten / five / seven …..

Listen to the teacher.Give the meaning

Read the words in chorus then in

individual.

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 68: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 68/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

Wildlife World

Around the world

2. While you read

Task 1: Matching

Asks the Ss to read three T.V programmeschedules and do task1.

Have the Ss to compare their answer withothers

Further explain and give correct feedback

Asks the Ss to read the definitions again

Task 2: True or FalseTell the Ss to read the programmes

carefully and decide what the statements

are T or F.

Ask the Ss to explain their answer to the

class.

Give correct answer and feedback.

Check the information in the reading.

Task 3: Answering the questions:

Asks the Ss to work in pair and ask and

answer the questions in the book.Call some pairs to tell their answer to the

class

Feedback and give correct answers.

3. After you readKeep the Ss to work in pair and ask them

to tell the partner about one of the TV

programmes they like watching best and

explain why.

Call some to tell their answer to the class.

Summary: 

Reading about TV programmes.

IV. homework: 

Tell about the best programmes on TV

you like best.

Prepare for Speaking.

1 = c

A cartoon is a series of changing drawing.2 = a

A drama is a play for the theatre,television or radio.

3 = d

A comedy is a film or a play that is

interested to be funny, usually with a

happy ending.

4 = b

A documentary is a film or a television

programme giving facts about something.

1. T

2. T

3. F The Nature of Language is the

documentary programme at 15.15 on

VTV3.

4. T

5. F VTV1 starts at 5.35 and the last

programme starts at 23.30

1. There are 5 film on

2. At 9.00 a.m, 12.00 p.m, 7.00 p.m, 11

p.m on VTV1 and 7.00p.m on VTV3.3. VTV2

4. Quiz Show

5. VTV1

6. the football.

I like Game Show Who is the millionaire

beat because the games gives me a lot of

useful knowledge and I like the MC, Mr.

Lai Van Sam.

I like the programme Suc song moi

because it gives us a lot of usefulknowledge for women.

Write the homework

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 69: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 69/189

Page 70: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 70/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

-Ask s to give the answer.

-Give feedback.Task 2:

Ask s to look at the chart, mark “x” on the

types of the mass media which has the

following features:

Features The

massmedia

TV ra..

b.. in.

1 provide information and

entertainment orally.

2 receive information

visually

3 present information &

entertainment visually4 receive information

Visually

5 present information &

Entertainment orally & v

6 get information aurally

and visually

7 provide/deliver

information and entert..

Task 3:

Ask Ss open the books.Get Ss to work in pairs, to talk about the

mass media using chart.

A: what ......... types .........?

B: .......................................

A: what features ................?

B: ........................................

A:what ......... own features?

B: ........................................ 

Go around the class to observe and give

help (if any)

Call 2 pairs of good Ss to go to board (tocheck)

Summary: 

Speaking about TV programmes.

IV. homework: 

Ask s to learn by heart new words.

Write a short paragraph about the types of

the mass media and their features.

Prepare the next lesson.

-Take notes.

Fea.. The mass media

TV Ra Bo

Internet

1 x x x

2 x x

3 x x x

4 x x x

5 X

6 X

7 x x x x

-Take notes.keys:

A: what are different types of the mass

media?

B: TV, radio, newspapers, Internet.

A: what features do they have in

common?B: provide/ deliver information and

entertainment.

A: what are their own features?

B: TV present ..... orally and visually.

A: what are different types of the mass

media?

B: TV, radio, newspapers, Internet.

A: what features do they have in

common?

B: provide/ deliver information and

entertainment.

A: what are their own features?

B: TV present ..... orally and visually.

Write the homework

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 71: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 71/189

Unit 7 THE mass media

Period 40 : ListeningDate :  ……………………..

 A. Objective:

1. Aims: - Provide Ss with some new words/ phrases

By the end of the lesson students will be able to

Listen to 2 news on the radio to get information.Fill in the information in the blank and answer the question...

Practice skills of talking and writing.2. Knowledge: Listen to the tapes, then tick the words the Ss hear in the right

column, filling the spaces and answering the questions.

3. Skill : Listening 

b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

d. procedure:

Teachers Activities Students Activities

I. Warm up

T asks s to close the book.

T introduces the picture of radio and asks

s to answer the questions.

1.  What is it?

2.  What is it used for?

3.  How often do you listen to radio?

4.  How many hours per week do you

listen to it?

5.  What topics do you like listening to

and why?T leads in the new lesson.

II. presentation

T practices Ss to listen and repeat the new

words.

T deals with the difficult words (if

necessary).

Task 1: T gives the situation and explains.

Has the Ss to read the given informationT asks s to skim the task 1.

T plays the tape 3 times.

Goes around the class to help the Ss

Ask the Ss to give their answers

Listen to the teacher.

Ss close the book.

–It is a radio

To listen to news, music...

Every day …..

Ten hours….

Music

Weather forecastNews…

Ss look at the picture and answer the

questions.

Listen to the tapes

Ss open the book.

Ss skim the task 1.

Ss listen to the tape.

Ss work individually and work in pair to

discuss.

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 72: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 72/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

T checks and asks to work individually

then work in pair.

The T reads the verbs.

Task 2

T gives situation and explains how to do.

T asks s to read the passage.

T plays the tape 3 times.

T checks and asks to work individually

then work in-group.

Task 3

T gives situation and explains how to do.

T plays the tape 3 times.

T checks and asks to work individually

then work in-group.

T asks Ss to work in-group and retell the

content of the passage.

After listening: 

T calls 1 good student to talk in front of

the class.

Other Ss listen and remark or correct

mistakes.

T asks to do writing text in the textbook.

Iii. homework: 

T asks to do writing text in the textbook.

(Task 2 and 3)Prepare for new lesson:

Writing lesson

Keys:

News

story1

News

story2

healthy x

strong X

young x

Cloudy X

Highest x

Wonderful x

Fine X

News story 1: News story 2

Has caused floods 23rd

Have left their homes 4418

Have risen California

Two meters wonderfulHas stopped young and

Cloudy healthy

Strong wind

Keys:1 Heavy rain has caused floods all over the

county during the night.

2 Because rivers have risen.

3 The old lady has climbed Mount

Whitney twenty-three times.4. Because it has kept her young and

healthy.

One S talk in front of the class

Listen and correct

Write the homework

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 73: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 73/189

Page 74: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 74/189

 Teachers Activities Students Activities

9. Learn more about the world and to

know and see many new things.-Tasks s

to work individually and then to work in

group for discussing.

T goes around to help s (if necessary)

T checks and gives the true answer.

Task 2

-T divides the class into 6 groups, and

asks s to work in group to fill in the

information of the advantages and

disadvantages.(2 groups will do the

same topic)

-Listening to music

-Reading newspaper

-Using the Internet

-T goes around to help s (if necessary)

Task 3Basing on the chart above T asks s to

write a short passage about the

advantages and the disadvantages+Listening to music

+Reading newspapers

+Using the Internet

+watching TVT asks s to work individually or groups.

T goes around to help s (if necessary)

T checks and feedback.

After writingCorrect the Ss work

iii. homework: 

- T asks Ss to write a short passage

about the advantages and the

disadvantages of using the computer.

Keys:

Advantages 

Listening

to radio

Make people

happy/life easier

Relax.Get/enlarge/

broaden knowledge

and understanding

Share

opinions/experiences

Reading

newspapers

Make people

happy/life easier

Get information on

many fields:

culture, art, business

Relax and entertain

Disadvantages 

Waste time

Make people

Passive

Harm people eyes:

be short-sighted

cost time and

money

Make people

Passive

One of the most popular types of mass

media is watching TV. Most of the people

watch T.V in their free time, especially in

England. But there are advantages and

disadvantages of watching T.V. It makes

things more memorable because it presents

information in a more effective way. It also

increases the popularity of sports and

games so it entertains us. Besides, it help us

learn more about the world, know and seemany new things. But it also give us some

Disdvantages. It interferes with family life

and communication. It makes people

violent and encourages us to buy things that

we do not need. It also makes us passive

Write the homework

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 75: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 75/189

Unit 7 THE mass media

Period 42 : Language FocusDate : …………………….. 

A. Objective:

1. Aims: Help the Ss recognize an pronounce three sounds:/ / , / / and / /

Help the Ss review: how to use ADV-Phrase of cause and concession

(because of, in spite of)2. Knowledge: Understand and use the structures

3. Skill : Grammar Practice

b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

d. procedure:

Teachers Activities Students Activities

I. Warm up

T asks s to choose the underlined wordpronunciate /ei/, /ai/, / i/ and fill in the

right column.

wildlife enjoy day climb

style fly toy noise

demonstration place airline

railway

afraid buy radio paper

time play destroy height

II. presentation

I. Pronunciation

The T reads the words, then asks the Ss toread in chorus

Have some Ss to read the words

The T reads the sentences, then asks theSs to read in chorus

Have some Ss to read the sentences

Ii . grammar

Task 1: The Present Perfect Tense-T writes down the examples on the board

and asks s to find the sense, the usage of

The Present Perfect.Eg:

1.  I have just cleaned the floor.2.  My brother has read “Gone with

the wind” three times.

3.  He has worked for BBC since 1990

4.  We have learnt English for 4 years.

T asks s to choose the underlined word

pronunciate /ei/, /ai/, / i/ and fill in the

right column. /ei/ day, demonstration, place, railway,

afraid, radio, paper, play.

 /ai/ wildlife, climb, style, fly, airline,

buy, time, height, / i/ enjoy, toy, noise, destroy

Listen to the teacher.

Read the words

Listen to the T, then read the sentences.

Listen to the T and take notes

Study the use of present perfect tense in

the sentences.

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 76: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 76/189

Teachers Activities Students Activities

T asks Ss to base on the examples to repeat

the usage of The Present Perfect.

* What adverbs are used with Present

Perfect?T asks Ss to read the letter and choose the

verbs of the correct form.T asks Ss to work individually or groups.

T goes around to help s (if necessary)

T checks and gives the right answer.

Task 2:

Asks the Ss to read and complete the

sentences

Task 3: Phrase or clause of reason and

concession

T gives handout and asks ss to combine A

with B.

A

1.  they did the test well

2.  he could not solve the problem

3.  the train was late

4. 

she walked slowlyPhrases and clauses of reasonBecause + Clause(S+V+O)

Because of +N/N phrase/Gerund

In spite of/despite+N/Nphr/Gerund

Although/though+Clause(S+V+O) 

Have the Ss to complete the sentences.

Summary :

Pronunciation.

Present Perfect and Phrase/

Clause of Reason

iii. homework: 

-T asks Ss to make sentences with Phrases

and clauses of reason and Phrases and

clauses of concession.

* The usage: 1.  an action has just happened

2.  an action repeated many times in

the past

3.  an action began in the past,happened in present and maybe

in the future.since, for, never, ever, so far, already,

recently, up to now…..

1. have been 2. have lived

3. have met 4. have done

5. have had 6. have taken

7. have watched

1. since 2. ago 3. for 4. or 5.

since

6. for 7. ago 8. ago 9. since

10. since

B

A because of her injured leg

B thought it was difficult

C although he is good at maths

D because of the thick fog

Keys: 1. They did the test well though it

was difficult

2. He could not solve the problem

although he is good at maths3. The train was late because of the

thick fog

4 She walked slowly because of her

injured leg

Keys:

1. Because of the cold weather, we kept

the fire all day.

2. In spite of the cold weather, we all

wore shorts.

3. Because of his illness, he had to

cancel the appointment.4. In spite of his illness, he managed to

come to school.

Write the homework

Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 77: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 77/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Period 83 : Reading Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matchingthe column, scan for specific information by gap-fill and decide True or False statement.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UPAsks the Ss to answer the questions:What colour of these national footballteams?England?Brazil?

France?Viet Nam?Ireland

II. PRESENTATION

I.  Before you read:

Ask s to work in groups to answer thequestions.Give some more questions.

Who is the man with the cup?What his number?

Vocabulary:Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then showthe new words.Explain new words:Passionate(adj) -> passionWitness (v)champion(n) -> championship (n)

compete (v) -> competitiongovern(v) -> government (n)title(n)honour (adj)Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus andindividually.

Answers the teachar’s questions:

WhiteYellow and green

BlueRedGreen

Ss do the task and give their answers.1.  In Japan and Korea.2.  Brazil3.  Germany

He is Cafu, the captain of Brazil

Number two.

Look at their books and repeat after thecassette once.

Take note and repeat the words after theteacher.

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 78: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 78/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

II. While you read:

Task 1: Matching A with B

Let the Ss read the words and combine them.

Task 2: Fill in the blanks:Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs tocomplete the gapsGoes around the class to help the Ss.Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of

the class.

Task : True / false statements

Asks s to work in group and choose the bestchoice for the statements.T goes around class to help themT asks the Ss to say their answer.

After you read:

Ask the Ss to talk about the mentioned eventsT goes around class to help themT calls some pairs to practiceT corrects and gives feedback

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Read the reading passage and give correctanswer.Keys:

1-  b

2-  c3-  a4-  e5-  d

Read the reading passage, then work in pairsto fill in the blanksExpected answers:

1.  13

2.  323.  Argentina4.  one5.  26

Work in pair to choosee T or FExpected answers:1. F ( 1930)2. F (4 years)3. T

4. T5. F (5 times)

1.  the year when FIFA was set up2.  The number of teams taking part in 1st 

W.C3.  The year of 1st WC4.  The number of WCT by 20025.  The year when Wcwas held jointly

Work in group to summsrize the text

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 79: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 79/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 43 : Reading

 Date : ...................................A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: Read the passage , understand the story of the village and guessthe meaning of the words and phrases.

Read and answer the questions about the reading passage. 2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about a village. Improve reading

comprehension skill by filling the chart and answering the questions in the reading.3. Skill : Reading

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDUCE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

NetworksAsks the Ss to work in group and make alist of words related to the country.

II. PRESENTATION

Before you read:

a. Pair work: Discuss the questions

Have the Ss to work in pairs.

Go around the class and asks some to saytheir answers.Asks the Ss to say their answer in front ofthe class

b. Vocabulary: straw (n)mud (n)technical high schoolfarming methods

brick house (n) house made of bricksthank to (prep.) because ofHave the Ss to say the meaning.

farmer field

glass straw

They are harvesting the crop.They are working very hardIt is a bumper crop.Good farming methods, modern

technology, fertilizers, rotations…

Read the words, say the meaning.

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

crop

houses cattle

fowls

Country 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 80: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 80/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

While you read:

a. Task 1: Vocabulary matching

Ask the Ss to read the letter and choose thebest answer A, B, C or D to match with themeaning of the word.

Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.Asks the Ss to tell the meaning of the words

b. Task 2: Table Completing

Asks the Ss to see the passage to get specificinformation to complete the table.Ask the Ss to work in pairs.Call some pairs to act out the activity in frontof the class.

Feedback and give correct answers.

c. Task 3: Answering the questions:

Asks the Ss to work in pairs: Read thereading passage and answer the questions.Call some pairs to act out the activity in fronof the class.Feedback and give correct answers.

After you read:

Discussion:

Have the Ss work in group and answer thequestions.Have the SS to work in group.Go around the class and asks the Ss todiscuss their answer with another groups

SUMMARY: Reading about a village.III. HOMEWORK Summarize the reading passage.

1. b cÇn kiÖm ®ñ sèng2. d thiÕu thèn ®ñ thø3. a c¶i thiÖn cuéc sèng4. e vô mïa béi thu

5. c c©y trång ®Ó b¸n thu lîi nhuËn

Houses: made of straw and mud / made ofbricks

Radio and TV: Few families had a radioor TV set / many families havethem.

Farming methods: Old / new

Crop: poor / good / bumperTravel: Not / by motorbikeSuggested answers:1. It was poor and simple.2. Because they hope that with an educationof science and technology their childrencould find a way of bettering their lives.3. They introduce new farming methodswhich resulted in bumper crop. They alsohelped grow cash crops for export.

4. He said their life had changed a lot thanksto the knowledge their children had broughthome.5. He told his grandchildren: “ Study harderso that you can do more for the village thanyour parents did”Work in group:

Use new methods.Grow more cash crop for exports.

Apply scientific progressHelp local people and family apply moderntechnology in farmingWrite the homework 

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 81: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 81/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 44 : Speaking

 Date : ...................................

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: Talk about a plan and results 

2. Knowledge: Talk about plans to improve life of a village and their possibleresults.

3. Skill : Speaking B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

What should you use to improve the life in avillage?

II. PRESENTATION

Speaking

Task 1:

Vocabulary:resurface (n)canal (adj)

muddy (n)Ask the Ss to work in group and discussionabout the thing to do to improve the villagelife. Match the plan with its possible result.Call some Ss to read their sentences. 

Task 2:

Have Ss work in group and read thesentences, using the given information.

What structure is used?

New technologyNew machinetractors

pumping machinesnew cash cropsopening a libraryUsing internet……………….

Listen to the teacher.

Read the wordsRead the given sentences.

Read their answers.Suggested answers:1. b2. g3. d4. e5. f6. c

Conditional sentences.

If the road are widened, cars and lorries canget to our village.If cars and lorries can get to our village, wewon’t have to cart heavy loads of farmingproducts to the city

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 82: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 82/189

Page 83: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 83/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 45 : Listening 

 Date : .................................A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to listen and to a talkabout their hometown or home village changes.

2. Knowledge: Simple past tense.3. Skill : Listening skills through True / False and Gap-filling exercises.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. Warm-up: Crosswords

I have a word containing 6 letters. It meanspleasure party including outdoor meal.What word is it?

III. Presentation:

1. Before listening:*Ask Ps to look at the pictures and discussabout the changes between the two town.Ex:In the past, the town used to have only smallhouses, but now there are tall buildings.In the past there weren’t any hotel, but nowthere is a hotel in the village.

Have the Ss to work in groups.The T goes around the class, listen t the Tand give feedback.Asks some groups to tell their answers2. While listening: Task 1:  True - False Statements

Ask Ps to study the given sentencescarefully.

Before listening, ask the Ss to say if thesentences are T or F

HOMEVILLAGE 

Suggested answers:1. Yes, I do.2. At weekends or summer holiday.3. To have a good time after hard work.- Listen and repeat:1. glorious (adj) : beautiful, shining2.spacious (adj ) :large3.destination ( n) : a place to which a personis going to4.left – over ( n ) the rest : thøc ¨n thõa

5. Botanical Garden : V-ên B¸ch Th¶o

Tell their guesses:1. T

2. F3. T4. F5. T

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 84: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 84/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

-Ask Ps to listen.Call the Ss to say their answer.Feedback and give correct answer. Comparewith their guesses

Task 2: Gap – fillingHave the Ss to read the given passage tounderstand the meaning of the passage.Ask Ps to guess the words to fill.The T reads the text again and asks the Ss towrite the missing words.Tell the Ss to write the exact word for theblanks.Let the Ss to discuss their answer withfriends.

Feedback and give correct answer:

Task 3: Answering questions:

Ask Ps to guess the answer, then comparethe answers.

3. After listening:Ask Ps to work in group and map outthe plan for the picnic this weekend.

IV. Homework:

Write the story of the old man.

Listen to the T, write the correct answer.Compare with their guesses.Right answers:1. F (It is on the South of England)2. F (It used to be a small quiet town)3. T

4. F ( A lot of trees have been cut down forwider streets)5. F ( Some people don’t like the changes,they miss the quiet and peaceful life of theold town.)

Work in group.

Suggested answers:1. The weather was very nice.

2.Yes, it was.3.The garden was beautiful.4. They could sleep soundly because it wasso peaceful and quiet in the garden.

5. They took pictures, played games, talkedsang and dance.

Discuss and make a decision:Nhat Le Beach

Phong Nha Cave

MountainThe countrysideNext Sunday

At Christmas

Prepare for new lesson: Writing

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE

Period 46 : Writing

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 85: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 85/189

  Date : December 23rd, 2006

A. OBJECTIVE:1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a confirmation

letter responding to a request and an invitation.2. Knowledge : Request – Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we

need for the trip?

Confirm –Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything youneed for the trip.

3. Skill: Writing a confirmation letter. B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. Warm-up:

Which words you can use with LETTER?What are they?

II. Presentation:

Explain the definition of request and con-firmation letter.Request is the letter that asks forinformation or help.Confirmation is the letter that respondsto the request. It confirms whether thehelp is provided or not.

Task 1:Finding request and confirmation Ask the Ps to read the two letters below andfind request in Nga’s letter and confirma-tion in Hoa’s letter.

businessfriendlyinvitationapology LETTER thank youcomplaintloveget-wellconfirmation

Suggested answers:Request: Can you go shopping with me tobuy the things we need for the trip?

Confirmation: Certainly. I will help youto prepare everything you need for the trip.

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

English 10 Unit 8 , P. 46 Writing

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 86: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 86/189

 

Task 2: Writing confirmation

Ask Ps to read the situations carefully andfind the request in both of them.Tells Ss to choose one of these situations towrite a confirmation letter responding to each

of themAsk Ps to work individually.1. Congratulation on birthday

Confirmationsignature

Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.

2. Tell if you can give the bookConfirmation

Suggest changing time to meetSignature.

Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.

Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.

Summary:

Write confirmation letter responding to arequest and an invitation.

IV. homework: Write instructions.

Get the request clearly :* Lan asks you to buy some fruits and

bring them to her house

*Minh wants to borrow you a book

about wildlife.

1) Dear Lan,

Firstly I would like to congratuyou on your 15th birthday. I’m glad to join ybirthday party next Sunday. Of course, I whelp you to prepare everything for the partwill buy all the things you need and bring thto your house an hour before the party.See you later.Yours,Mai

2)Dear Minh,

I am happy to tell you that the book want is available. You can use it for a weBut I will not be at home this Saturday. Cyou come on Sunday? I will wait for youday.See you then,Yours

Nam

Dear Hoa,I have received your letter which requests thdetails of the application form for the videolibrary. I enclose here the full form and you asked to fill out before send back to us. Youcan send us before Christmas and rememberattach a photo on the first page of the form.I am looking forward to hearing from you.Your truly,Director

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 87: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 87/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 47 : Language Focus

 Date : .....................................

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims : By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the presentprogressive and be going to in situations appropriately.

2. Knowledge : -/ ə / and / ə: /- Present progressive with a future meaning and be going to 

3. Skill: Listening, using the correct tenses.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP:Matching

A B1. stay a. some souvenirs2.go b. some photos3.send c. post cards4. take d. at home5. buy e. for a picnic

II. PRESENTATION:

A. Pronunciation:Demonstrate the sounds / ə / and / ə : / bypronouncing them clearly and slowly. / ə : / first pronounce the sound / ə / then

put your tongue forward and up a little. It’s along sound.

 / ə / first pronounce the sound / ə : / butmake it short. It’s a short sound.

Ask Ps to practice these sentences.

* Barbara’s, camerawas

* waterthirsty, Nurse

1- d 2 – e3- c 4 – b5 - a

Listen to these sound

 / ə /teacher, other

together, pagodaabout , today1.about, pagoda2.father, German

 / ə : /bird , termwork , shirtchurch , early

excursionher, learning, German

birds, returned, earlier

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 88: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 88/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

B. Grammar:

The Present progressive and be going to-Which tenses do we use to express futuremeaning?Will : an intention or decision made at the

moment of speakingBe going to: an intention or decisionthought about before the moment ofspeaking, expressing a plan, prediction.Present progressive: a future arrangementbetween people, common with go, come,

see, visit, meet, have (a party)

Exercise 1: Choosing the correct option Ask Ps to do exercise.

Structure to use: S + To Be + V. ingAsk Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.

Ex 2 : Using the correct formsPresent Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.

Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.

Ex 3: Completing exchanges

Present Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.Summary:

Review the tenses: Simple future, presentprogressive, near future

III. HOMEWORKTest yourself B

E.g. :

I’ll give you my phone number. Ring metonight.E.g.: We are going to have a holiday in

Ha Long this summer.

E.g.: I am having a birthday party nextSunday. Would you come with me? 

Suggested answers: 1.are you doing 4. am going to2.is getting married 5. is going to3.Are you going to

Suggested answers: 

1.are going 4. are you putting2.are having 5. is not going to3.is going to catch give

Suggested answers: 1. Are you going to see it

I’m doing my homework.2. We are visiting our grandparents3. What’s he going to do with it ?

He’s going to buy a new motorbike.4. It’s going to rain soon.5. I’m going to clean them later.Repeat the structuresWrite homework

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 89: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 89/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Period 83 : Reading Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matchingthe column, scan for specific information by gap-fill and decide True or False statement.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UPAsks the Ss to answer the questions:What colour of these national footballteams?England?Brazil?

France?Viet Nam?Ireland

II. PRESENTATION

I.  Before you read:

Ask s to work in groups to answer thequestions.Give some more questions.

Who is the man with the cup?What his number?

Vocabulary:Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then showthe new words.Explain new words:Passionate(adj) -> passionWitness (v)champion(n) -> championship (n)

compete (v) -> competitiongovern(v) -> government (n)title(n)honour (adj)Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus andindividually.

Answers the teachar’s questions:

WhiteYellow and green

BlueRedGreen

Ss do the task and give their answers.1.  In Japan and Korea.2.  Brazil3.  Germany

He is Cafu, the captain of Brazil

Number two.

Look at their books and repeat after thecassette once.

Take note and repeat the words after theteacher.

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 90: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 90/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

II. While you read:

Task 1: Matching A with B

Let the Ss read the words and combine them.

Task 2: Fill in the blanks:Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs tocomplete the gapsGoes around the class to help the Ss.Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of

the class.

Task : True / false statements

Asks s to work in group and choose the bestchoice for the statements.T goes around class to help themT asks the Ss to say their answer.

After you read:

Ask the Ss to talk about the mentioned eventsT goes around class to help themT calls some pairs to practiceT corrects and gives feedback

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Read the reading passage and give correctanswer.Keys:

1-  b

2-  c3-  a4-  e5-  d

Read the reading passage, then work in pairsto fill in the blanksExpected answers:

1.  13

2.  323.  Argentina4.  one5.  26

Work in pair to choosee T or FExpected answers:1. F ( 1930)2. F (4 years)3. T

4. T5. F (5 times)

1.  the year when FIFA was set up2.  The number of teams taking part in 1st 

W.C3.  The year of 1st WC4.  The number of WCT by 20025.  The year when Wcwas held jointly

Work in group to summsrize the text

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 91: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 91/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 43 : Reading

 Date : ...................................A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: Read the passage , understand the story of the village and guessthe meaning of the words and phrases.

Read and answer the questions about the reading passage. 2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about a village. Improve reading

comprehension skill by filling the chart and answering the questions in the reading.3. Skill : Reading

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDUCE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

NetworksAsks the Ss to work in group and make alist of words related to the country.

II. PRESENTATION

Before you read:

a. Pair work: Discuss the questions

Have the Ss to work in pairs.

Go around the class and asks some to saytheir answers.Asks the Ss to say their answer in front ofthe class

b. Vocabulary: straw (n)mud (n)technical high schoolfarming methods

brick house (n) house made of bricksthank to (prep.) because ofHave the Ss to say the meaning.

farmer field

glass straw

They are harvesting the crop.They are working very hardIt is a bumper crop.Good farming methods, modern

technology, fertilizers, rotations…

Read the words, say the meaning.

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

crop

houses cattle

fowls

Country 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 92: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 92/189

Page 93: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 93/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 44 : Speaking

 Date : ...................................

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: Talk about a plan and results 

2. Knowledge: Talk about plans to improve life of a village and their possibleresults.

3. Skill : Speaking B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

What should you use to improve the life in avillage?

II. PRESENTATION

Speaking

Task 1:

Vocabulary:resurface (n)canal (adj)

muddy (n)Ask the Ss to work in group and discussionabout the thing to do to improve the villagelife. Match the plan with its possible result.Call some Ss to read their sentences. 

Task 2:

Have Ss work in group and read thesentences, using the given information.

What structure is used?

New technologyNew machinetractors

pumping machinesnew cash cropsopening a libraryUsing internet……………….

Listen to the teacher.

Read the wordsRead the given sentences.

Read their answers.Suggested answers:1. b2. g3. d4. e5. f6. c

Conditional sentences.

If the road are widened, cars and lorries canget to our village.If cars and lorries can get to our village, wewon’t have to cart heavy loads of farmingproducts to the city

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 94: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 94/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

How is it used?What ‘s its structure?Asks the Ss to practise in group of three.* Build a bridge over the canal-> The villagers have a shorter way to town.-> They can take their farming products to

the town and get more money--> build amedical centre -> People’s health is lookedafter -> grow more cash crops.Have the Ss to discuss in group. The T goesaround the class, listen to the Ss and correcttheir answers.Asks some groups to practise in front of theclass.Give feedback and correct the answers.

* Build a new school -> The children canhave better conditions to study -> Studybetter -> Go to higher education -> Help thevillage grow cash crops -> get more money -> build a football ground -> The young andthe old can play sports or do exercises ->they become healthier to work.

Let the Ss to discuss in group. The T goes

around the class, listen to the Ss and correcttheir answers.Asks some groups to practise in front of theclass.

Summary: Speak about the plans for the village.

III. HOMEWORK 

Made ten conditional sentences, type 1 aboutyour plans for study.Prepare for Listening. Read the giveninformation.

Future possibleMain clause: Simple futureIf clause: Simple present

A. What should we have to do first?B. In my opinion, we should build a bridge

over the canal first.C. That ‘s right. If we build a bridge over thecanal, we can take our farming products tothe town and get more moneyA. Great. And if we get more money, we willbuild a medical centreB. And if we build a medical centre, people’shealth will be looked afterC. Yes, if our health is looked after, we willgrow more cash crops.

D. Let discuss about what to do first. Whatdo you think?E. I think we should build a new school firstF. It’s a great idea. If we build a new schoolfirst, our children can have better conditionsto studyD. And if they have good conditions tostudy, they will study better.E. Great. And if they have good condition to

study, they can go to higher education.F. Yes, I think so. And if they can go tohigher education, they can help the villagegrow cash crops and we can get more moneyD. That’s right. And if we can get moremoney, we will build a football groundE. And if we build a football ground, theyoung and the old can play sports or doexercisesF. And if they can play sport every day, theywill be healthier to work and study.

Write the homework 

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 95: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 95/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 45 : Listening 

 Date : .................................A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to listen and to a talkabout their hometown or home village changes.

2. Knowledge: Simple past tense.3. Skill : Listening skills through True / False and Gap-filling exercises.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. Warm-up: Crosswords

I have a word containing 6 letters. It meanspleasure party including outdoor meal.What word is it?

III. Presentation:

1. Before listening:*Ask Ps to look at the pictures and discussabout the changes between the two town.Ex:In the past, the town used to have only smallhouses, but now there are tall buildings.In the past there weren’t any hotel, but nowthere is a hotel in the village.

Have the Ss to work in groups.The T goes around the class, listen t the Tand give feedback.Asks some groups to tell their answers2. While listening: Task 1:  True - False Statements

Ask Ps to study the given sentencescarefully.

Before listening, ask the Ss to say if thesentences are T or F

HOMEVILLAGE 

Suggested answers:1. Yes, I do.2. At weekends or summer holiday.3. To have a good time after hard work.- Listen and repeat:1. glorious (adj) : beautiful, shining2.spacious (adj ) :large3.destination ( n) : a place to which a personis going to4.left – over ( n ) the rest : thøc ¨n thõa

5. Botanical Garden : V-ên B¸ch Th¶o

Tell their guesses:1. T

2. F3. T4. F5. T

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 96: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 96/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

-Ask Ps to listen.Call the Ss to say their answer.Feedback and give correct answer. Comparewith their guesses

Task 2: Gap – fillingHave the Ss to read the given passage tounderstand the meaning of the passage.Ask Ps to guess the words to fill.The T reads the text again and asks the Ss towrite the missing words.Tell the Ss to write the exact word for theblanks.Let the Ss to discuss their answer withfriends.

Feedback and give correct answer:

Task 3: Answering questions:

Ask Ps to guess the answer, then comparethe answers.

3. After listening:Ask Ps to work in group and map outthe plan for the picnic this weekend.

IV. Homework:

Write the story of the old man.

Listen to the T, write the correct answer.Compare with their guesses.Right answers:1. F (It is on the South of England)2. F (It used to be a small quiet town)3. T

4. F ( A lot of trees have been cut down forwider streets)5. F ( Some people don’t like the changes,they miss the quiet and peaceful life of theold town.)

Work in group.

Suggested answers:1. The weather was very nice.

2.Yes, it was.3.The garden was beautiful.4. They could sleep soundly because it wasso peaceful and quiet in the garden.

5. They took pictures, played games, talkedsang and dance.

Discuss and make a decision:Nhat Le Beach

Phong Nha Cave

MountainThe countrysideNext Sunday

At Christmas

Prepare for new lesson: Writing

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE

Period 46 : Writing

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 97: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 97/189

  Date : December 23rd, 2006

A. OBJECTIVE:1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a confirmation

letter responding to a request and an invitation.2. Knowledge : Request – Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we

need for the trip?

Confirm –Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything youneed for the trip.

3. Skill: Writing a confirmation letter. B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. Warm-up:

Which words you can use with LETTER?What are they?

II. Presentation:

Explain the definition of request and con-firmation letter.Request is the letter that asks forinformation or help.Confirmation is the letter that respondsto the request. It confirms whether thehelp is provided or not.

Task 1:Finding request and confirmation Ask the Ps to read the two letters below andfind request in Nga’s letter and confirma-tion in Hoa’s letter.

businessfriendlyinvitationapology LETTER thank youcomplaintloveget-wellconfirmation

Suggested answers:Request: Can you go shopping with me tobuy the things we need for the trip?

Confirmation: Certainly. I will help youto prepare everything you need for the trip.

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

English 10 Unit 8 , P. 46 Writing

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 98: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 98/189

 

Task 2: Writing confirmation

Ask Ps to read the situations carefully andfind the request in both of them.Tells Ss to choose one of these situations towrite a confirmation letter responding to each

of themAsk Ps to work individually.1. Congratulation on birthday

Confirmationsignature

Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.

2. Tell if you can give the bookConfirmation

Suggest changing time to meetSignature.

Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.

Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.

Summary:

Write confirmation letter responding to arequest and an invitation.

IV. homework: Write instructions.

Get the request clearly :* Lan asks you to buy some fruits and

bring them to her house

*Minh wants to borrow you a book

about wildlife.

1) Dear Lan,

Firstly I would like to congratuyou on your 15th birthday. I’m glad to join ybirthday party next Sunday. Of course, I whelp you to prepare everything for the partwill buy all the things you need and bring thto your house an hour before the party.See you later.Yours,Mai

2)Dear Minh,

I am happy to tell you that the book want is available. You can use it for a weBut I will not be at home this Saturday. Cyou come on Sunday? I will wait for youday.See you then,Yours

Nam

Dear Hoa,I have received your letter which requests thdetails of the application form for the videolibrary. I enclose here the full form and you asked to fill out before send back to us. Youcan send us before Christmas and rememberattach a photo on the first page of the form.I am looking forward to hearing from you.Your truly,Director

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 99: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 99/189

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 47 : Language Focus

 Date : .....................................

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims : By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the presentprogressive and be going to in situations appropriately.

2. Knowledge : -/ ə / and / ə: /- Present progressive with a future meaning and be going to 

3. Skill: Listening, using the correct tenses.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP:Matching

A B1. stay a. some souvenirs2.go b. some photos3.send c. post cards4. take d. at home5. buy e. for a picnic

II. PRESENTATION:

A. Pronunciation:Demonstrate the sounds / ə / and / ə : / bypronouncing them clearly and slowly. / ə : / first pronounce the sound / ə / then

put your tongue forward and up a little. It’s along sound.

 / ə / first pronounce the sound / ə : / butmake it short. It’s a short sound.

Ask Ps to practice these sentences.

* Barbara’s, camerawas

* waterthirsty, Nurse

1- d 2 – e3- c 4 – b5 - a

Listen to these sound

 / ə /teacher, other

together, pagodaabout , today1.about, pagoda2.father, German

 / ə : /bird , termwork , shirtchurch , early

excursionher, learning, German

birds, returned, earlier

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 100: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 100/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

B. Grammar:

The Present progressive and be going to-Which tenses do we use to express futuremeaning?Will : an intention or decision made at the

moment of speakingBe going to: an intention or decisionthought about before the moment ofspeaking, expressing a plan, prediction.Present progressive: a future arrangementbetween people, common with go, come,

see, visit, meet, have (a party)

Exercise 1: Choosing the correct option Ask Ps to do exercise.

Structure to use: S + To Be + V. ingAsk Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.

Ex 2 : Using the correct formsPresent Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.

Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.

Ex 3: Completing exchanges

Present Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.Summary:

Review the tenses: Simple future, presentprogressive, near future

III. HOMEWORKTest yourself B

E.g. :

I’ll give you my phone number. Ring metonight.E.g.: We are going to have a holiday in

Ha Long this summer.

E.g.: I am having a birthday party nextSunday. Would you come with me? 

Suggested answers: 1.are you doing 4. am going to2.is getting married 5. is going to3.Are you going to

Suggested answers: 

1.are going 4. are you putting2.are having 5. is not going to3.is going to catch give

Suggested answers: 1. Are you going to see it

I’m doing my homework.2. We are visiting our grandparents3. What’s he going to do with it ?

He’s going to buy a new motorbike.4. It’s going to rain soon.5. I’m going to clean them later.Repeat the structuresWrite homework

UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 101: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 101/189

Page 102: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 102/189

Page 103: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 103/189

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD 

Period 55: Speaking  Date : January 3

rd  , 2010 

A. OBJECTIVE 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know how to

protect our oceans, talk about causes and consequences and offer solutions.

2. Knowledge: Put the actions in order and discuss sollutions

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

T gives games.

+What should we do to protect our

environment?

plastic bags clean the beach

waste paper no smoking

-What would you do if our environment hadmuch rubbish?

T corrects and introduces new lesson: To

understand more about undersea world to day

we learn unit 9 lesson: Speaking.

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1T asks s to work in pairs. There are

Some actions that should be taken to protect

our oceans. Put them in order the importance

and explain why.

T directs the Ss to do.

Asks the Ss to speak and explains the reason.

+Who can find out the new words?

Ss work in-group and answer.

-S listen and answer.

Tell the answers

S work in pairs.

-Speak and explain the reason

The answer can be different.

1: a, d, b,

2.  b, d, c

3.  b, c, d….. 

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

The activitiesto protect...

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 104: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 104/189

Write the new words:

+Sparingly

+Dispose of

+Smart shopper

+Endangered

-T reads new words then Ss repeat.

Task 2

T asks s to work in groups. There are somethreats to the health of the oceans. Discuss the

consequences that might occur and offer some

possible solutions.

T directs Ss to do.

T asks Ss to report.

The consequences might occur:

-Beaches are filled with plastic bags, pieces of

glass and cigarette butts.

Asks Ss to offer some possible solutions.

Asks Ss to keep the beach clean and placetrash, plastic bags in proper bust bins.

Asks Ss to continue to discuss the

consequences and offer some possible

solutions.

Goes around the class to check and help the Ss

to practice.

Has some pairs to practice in front of the class.

Gives feedback and correct answers

Task 3

The teacher asks the Ss to work in group andreport their ideas in front of the class.

Goes around the class to check and help the Ss

to practice.

Has some pairs to practice in front of the class.

Gives feedback and correct answers

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Summary:

Speaking: Tell about actions that harm the seaand sea animals. Pair work and discussion

* Preparing for new lesson:

Read information in listening lesson.

Find new words or phrases.

Tell the new words and read them

Write new words in the note books

Group work:

Expected answers: 1.  A. Whales and sharks are still hunted for

food, medicine, and other products. Thismakes them become extinct.

B. We should not fish for them because

they are limited/ threatened /

endangered

2. A. Explosives are used to catch fish and

other sea animals. This make sea animals be in

danger.

B. We should not use explosives to catch

fish because it can kill all the animals in the

sea.

3. A. Oil is spilled from the tankers. This

makes the sea polluted and kill marine

animals.

B. We should protest the oil tankers and

clean the sea after oil spilling.Report the content of the discussion in front of

the class.

Expected answers: 1.  Whales and sharks are still hunted for

food, medicine, and other products. This makes

them become extinct. So we should not fish for

them because they are limited/ threatened /

endangered

2. Explosives are used to catch fish and

other sea animals. This makes sea animals be

in danger and we should not use explosives to

catch fish because it can kill all the animals in

the sea.

3. Oil is spilled from the tankers. This

makes sea polluted and kill marine animals

We should protest the oil tankers and clean thesea after oil spilling. 

Look at new lesson

Take notes

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 105: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 105/189

 

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD 

Period 56: Listening  Date: January 3

rd  , 2

A. OBJECTIVE 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listen about

whale, a species of animal living in the sea and practice skills of talking and writing.

.  2. Knowledge:  Listen and choose the true and false information. Fill in the information in the blank and answer the questions. 

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

T asks s to close the book

-T asks s to give some ways of the protections

of the undersea environment.-T corrects.

-T hangs the big picture of whale on the green

board and asks s.

+What is it?

+Who can describe it?

-T introduces new lesson: To understand more

about the whale. Today we will learn Unit 9

lesson: listening.

II. PRESENTATION1. Before you listen:

Activities 1

Write 2 questions on the green board

+ Do you think whales are fish? Why (not)?

-Asks s to discuss in pairs before answering.

+Why do people keep hunting whales?

-Introducing some vocabularies which will

have in cassette.

+mammal+krill

+blue whale

+whaling

+Atlantic

+migrate. 

+pacific

+conservation

S close the book

-S work individually

-S listen and answer.

Look at the picture and answer the questions:

It is a whale

It is very long

It is very big

Whales are not fish because they raise their

young on milk.

-Because they want to catch whales for food,

oil, leather and other products.

-Listen and write

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 106: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 106/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

2. While you listen

Task 1:

-Translate the requirement into Vietnamese.

-T explains

-Who can find the new words?

-T opens cassette (the first) and (the second).

-T writes Ss’ keys on the board and asks Ss to

explain why (T can give good marks)

-T opens cassette (the third)

Task 2:

-Translate the requirement into Vietnamese.-T explains

-Who can find the new words?

-T opens cassette (the first) and (the second).

Has the Ss to answer the questions

-T writes Ss’ keys on the board and asks Ss to

explain why (T can give good marks)

After you listen:

Ask the Ss to work in group to talk about

whales, using the given cues:

Their length and weight.

Their feeding grounds and food

The reason for protecting whales.

Have some pairs tell their answers in front of

the class

Gives feedback and correct the mistakes.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Summary:Listening: Listen about whales.

T / F Information

Ask and answer the questions.

* Preparing for new lesson:

Read information in language focus lesson.

Study the grammar note

Find new words or phrases.

S work individually

S find and answer.

Expected answers: 

1.  F

2.  T

3.  T

4.  F

5.  T

Listen and check the keys.

Discuss in pairs.

Listen to the tapes.Answer

Check.

Expected answers: 1.  The blue whale grows to 30 meters in

length and 200 tons in weight.

2.  Because there ins a lot of krill – their

favourite food in cold water.

3.  Cold water in the North and South

Atlantic Ocean and Pacific is .

4.  Heavy hunting is.5.  They have asks the IWC to stop …

6.  They would disappear forever.

Repeat the content of the lesson

Tell the answers in front of the class.

Work in groups and then a person answers.-Listen and write.

+Length: 30 meters

+Weight: 200 Tons

+Food: krill; in cold water.

+Reason to protect

Disappear not 

Take notes

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 107: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 107/189

 

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD 

Period 57: Writing  Date : January 10th , 2010 

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to underst

the description of the sperm whale and complete the table.

-Write a paragraph that describes the facts and figures (about the dolphin) provided

the table.

2. Knowledge: Improve their writing skill. B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE: 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

-Dividing s into 2 groups

-Using gestures, mine or other words to

explain some animals of the sea.

(Starfish; turtle; shark; sperm whale; whale;

dolphin; jellyfish; fish; crab; shrimp;)

-Asking each group in turns to guess the

animals (if they have right word, they will get

one point)

+The group that has more points will be

winner.

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1:-Asking some questions about the pictures in

the textbook.

+Where is it?

+What kind of animals is it? (Are they)

-Do you know any thing about them?

-Sperm whales are the biggest animals that

have teeth.

-Dolphins are the most intelligent animals

(These answers are up to the s)

*Pre-teaching some new words:+Range habitat: (explanation)

+Carnivore: example

+Life span: example

+Offspring: picture

+To be at risk: explanation.

-Asking s to read the description and the

information in the table carefully.

--Asks s to answer some questions.

Listen to the T and answer the questions

Playing the game.

-Guessing the words.

Go to the blackboard and write the words.Starfish turtle shark

sperm whale whale dolphin

 jellyfish fish crab shrimp 

Answer the questions.

Expected answers: 

+It is at the sea

+It is a sperm whale

-They are dolphin

Listen and write

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 108: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 108/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Asks the Ss to read the description and the

information in the table carefully.

--Asks s to answer some questions.

+Where do sperm whales live?

+Where can sperm whales be found?

+Which ocean do they prefer?+ Would you tell me the length and the length

and weight of a male/female whale?

+How long is a gestation period?

+How about offspring?

+How long can whales be?

+What are some tricks that people play on

whales?

+Why should people be concerned about

endangered whales?

Task 2:

-Divides class into 4 or 6 groups (it defends on

the arrangement of the desks in the class room)

-Gives each group a poster

-Asking the groups to fill in the table of task 1.

-When finishing, ask them to stick their poster

on the board and feed back.

-Asks Ss to read the information in the table

carefully and use the information to write a

paragraph that describes the facts and figures

provided in the table.

-T goes round and monitors.

-Giving Ss some help if necessary.

Task 3: 

Asking Ss to correct their partners’ papers.Feeds back.

III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK

Asks s to write a paragraph (120 words) about

one of the sea animals that they know

Be ready for language focus lesson 

Read carefully and answer.

Expected answers: They live in all ocean, but they prefer water

with high squid population.

The male can grow up to 18 meters in length

and weigh up to 54,000 kg

The female can grow up to 12 meters in length

and weigh up to 17,000 kg

14 to 19 months

Give birth to one calf every five to seven

years.

Hunting and fishing.

So that they can not be in danger of extinction.

Work in groupWrite the paragraph. Suggestion writing: Dolphin are not fish. They are mammals that

live in the water. Dolphins are among the most

intelligent animals on Earth. Although they canbe found in all ocean in the world, they prefer

coastal water and bays. The size of Dolphin

vary greatly. The smallest Dolphin is just

about 50kg in weight and 1.2meters in length

while the largest one can weight up to 8.200kg

and is 10 meters long. Dolphins are carnivores

and they eat mainly fish. A female dolphin

gives birth to one calf every two years after a

gestation period of eleven to twelve months. A

dolphin can normally live from twenty to sixty

years and some species of dolphins can even

live longer. Dolphin populations are at risk due

to the population of their habitat and accidental

entrapment in fishing net.

Peer correction

Take notes

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 109: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 109/189

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD 

Period 58: Language Focus  Date : January 10 th, 2010

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of   the lesson, the students will be able

distinguish the pronunciation between / / and / / sounds, how to use should and sente

Type II.

2. Knowledge: Advice and giving ideasPutting the verbs in correct form. 

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE: 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

The teacher gives some words and asks the

people to read them.

*Play game: (use cards)-Divide the class into two groups

-Hangs all cards on the board and gives

instruction for the game.

II. PRESENTATIONI. Pronunciation

 / i: / and / i /

Task 1:T presents how to pronounce the sounds:

 / /, / / and / /-Says the sounds in context of the words

A, Listen and repeat:

-Reads or plays the tape once and asks s to

repeat.

-Reads two times

-Calls some s to practice

-Asks s to close your book

Listen to the T

Put the words in correct column.

Fell -> felt

Take -> took

Understand -> understood

Walk -> walked

Come -> came

Listen to the T

Repeat the words after the T

Listen to the tapes

Repeat

Practise

UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

UnderstandWalkCome

CameTaken

FeltUnderstood

 Walked

Feel Take

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 110: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 110/189

Page 111: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 111/189

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Period 59 : ReadingDate : .............................

A. OBJECTIVE 

By the end of the lesson students will be able to

-  Widen vocabulary topic “environment” and use them to talk about

reasons why some animals have become extinct.

B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

I. WARM UP:

Asking some questions.

1. What are some global problems?

2. what need we do to solve these

problems?

* Introducing the word conservation by

asking some questions.

1. What is conservation?

2, Do we need to protect plants and

animals? why or why not?

II. PRESENTATION 

Before you read:1.  Ask the Ss to answer the questions

2.  Vocabulary:

Giving for s “handout” and guiding the way

to do.

Put the suitable forms of words:

NOUN VERB

1, ? 1,protect

2, ? 2,destroy

3,pollution 3, ?

4,damage 4, ?5,conservation 5, ?

6, ? 6, disappear

While you read:

Answer

Keys:

1.  protection

2.  destruction

3.  pollute

4.  damage

5.  conserve6.  disappearance

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

environmental

problems

forest

fires

The extinction

of plants &...

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 112: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 112/189

 TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

The T has the Ss listen to the reading

passage.

Task 1: Matching A with B

Let the Ss read the words and combine them.

Task 2: True / False Statements

Have the Ss read the text and decide if the

statements are true or false.

Give feedback and correct answers

Task 3: Choosing main idea Translates the main idea to find the topic.

Asks the Ss work ion group to find main idea

for each paragraph.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks the Ss to say their answer in front of the

class.

Topic: Many of those plants and animals canbe used as medicine against cancer, AIDS...

After you read:

Discussion:Answer the questions:

Asks the Ss to discuss the answers for the

questions.

Has them tell the answers. 

Summary: 

Reading about a village. 

III. HOMEWORK 

Summarize the reading passage.

Read the reading passage and give correct

answer.

Keys:

1-  C2-  A

3-  D

4-  B

Keys:

1.  F

2.  T

3.  T

4.  T

5.  F6.  F

Work in group to find the main idea.

Keys:

Passage A- 3: Forest give us a lot of valuable

things.

Passage B - 4: Vegetation can help conserve

water.

Passage C - 2: Let’s do something to save the

earth.

Keys:

1. The loss of many forests is destroying the

earth.

2. Man and most animals need a coast and

supply of water to live farmers need water

for their crops.

3. We should stop polluting rivers and seasand stop the disappearance of plants and

animals.

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 113: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 113/189

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Period 60  : SpeakingDate : January 15

th, 2010

A. OBJECTIVE 

1.  Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to-  Improve their speaking skill

-  talk about threats to animals, especially rare animals solutions for

protecting them

- make them more aware of the protection of animals

B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

I. WARM UP:

Plays game: Brainstorming

+Calls 2 s to go to the board and asks them

to name some animals they know.

II. PRESENTATION 

Before you speak: Task 1

Question- answer.

Asks s to look at the picture in the textbook

and then answer the questions (page 107)What can you see in the picture?

What should people do to save endangered

animals?

Pre-teach vocabulary.

Asks s to read the whole paragraphs and

find out new words.

Explains vocabulary

+against one’s will (idiom)

(translation)

+Kent (explanation)The name of an area in East-South of

England. It’s famous for growing vegetable

Go to the board and name some animals

elephant, tiger, horse, fish, gorilla...

Listen to the T and answer the questions:

I can see a gorilla

People should create real reconstruction of

the animals’natural environment.

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

animals

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 114: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 114/189

Page 115: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 115/189

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Period 61  : ListeningDate : January 15

th, 2010

A. OBJECTIVE 

By the end of the lesson students will be able to listen and understand some

information about the forest fire, the reasons cause the forest fire and the way how to savethe forest from fire. B. METHODS  Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

I. WARM UP:

-Jumbled words:

resfot iref-Introducing the content of the new lesson. II. PRESENTATION 

Before you listen:

-Teaching vocabulary:

+forester (n) (example)

+campfire (n) (picture)

+destroy (v) (synonym)

+valuable (adj) (explanation)

+awful (adj) (example)

-Checking new words by Rub out andremember.

-Asking s to close the books

-Giving some pictures about forest fire and

asking s some questions.

1, what do you see in the picture?

2, have you ever seen a forest destroyed by

fire?

3, which reasons may cause the forest fire?

-T feedback and introduce the content to

listen.

While you listen:Task1: Listen and number the events

you hear in the order

-work in groups to find the word:

“Forest fire”

write and read the words.

-listen, repeat, remember and rewrite.

close the books

-look at the pictures and answer some

questions

-work in pairs.

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 116: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 116/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

Asks s to read the requirement of the

exercise

Asks them to read the events to understand

the content.

Lets s guess by numbering the events in the

order.

Plays the tape twice.

T gives feedback.

Task2:

Listen again and decide whether the

following statements are true or false

Asks s to read the requirement of exercise.

Lets s read the statements

Asks s to guess T or F.

Plays the tape onceChecks the answer

Plays the tape sentence by sentence

T gives feedback.

Task3: Asks the Ss to Listen again and tick (v) the

sentences you hear.

The steps are the same task2

Plays the tape once

Plays the tape sentence by sentence

T gives feedback  After you listen:

Discussion:

Asks s to work in pairs to say how a forest

fire may start and what every camper ought

to remember.

Has the SS to work in group.

Go around the class and asks the Ss to

discuss their answer with another groups

III. HOMEWORK 

Asks s to write a paragraph (about 100

words) to say about what may cause a forest

fire.

Read the requirement

Read the events.

Work in pairs by guessing

Listen and number the events in the order s

hear

Keys:

3

2

1

4

Read the requirement-Read the statements in silently

-Work in 2 groups by guessing T or F

Keys:

1.F 2.F 3.T 4.T 5.F

Listen and tick (v) the sentence you hear

Keys:1.  B

2.  A

3.  A

A forest fire may start when the campers

leave a campfire burning near a heap of

leaves. They ought to remember to cover thecampfires by earth.

Write homework.

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 117: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 117/189

 UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Period 62  : WritingDate : January 15

th, 2010

A. OBJECTIVE 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand thecontent and the language using in the friendly letter of

invitation and understand how to write a friendly letter of invitation.

B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

I. WARM UP:

T gives the jumbled sentence.

a/dinner/evening/for/go/like/out/this/to/

you/would?

-T asks s the purpose of the question above.

-T asks s to give the same sentences.

-T gives some questions:

1,Have you written a letter of invitation?

On which occasion?

2,What do you often write in a letter of

invitation?

3,What are some expressions do you write

in a letter of invitation?

-T lead-in: A letter of invitation

II. PRESENTATION 

Before you write:

Task 1:

T explains how to do.

T goes round to help.

-T asks s to look at the complete sentences.Would you like +..........(to infinitive)

How about +...........(verb +ing)

Do you feel like+..........(verb +ing)

Are you free +............(to infinitive)

S close the book.

key:

->“Would you like to go out this evening

for dinner ?”

Yes

On my birthday party

Reason, date, time, place to come

Read the phrases and combine them

keys:

1.c

2.f

3.a

4.g

5.h

6.d

7.e

8.b

S open the book.

S work in pairs.

S open the book.

S work in pairs.

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 118: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 118/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

While you write:

Task 2:

-T asks s to skim the exercise and underline

the words/phrases.

-T goes round to help.

-T corrects mistakes and feedback.

Task 3: T asks s to read through the

exercise and write the sentences to complete

a letter.

-T goes round to help.

-T asks s to complete a letter 

After you write:

Ask the Ss to look at the writing and correct

it if it is necessary.

III. HOMEWORK : 

Write the letters to answer the invitation(Accepting or refusing letters)

1. Let’s try the cake I have just make.

2. Why don’t you join us in this trip?

3. Would you like to have a cold drink?

4. Do you feel like taking a walk for a while?

5. Can you sing with us a Vietnamese song?

6. How about going to the cinema tonight?

7. Shall we have some chicken soup first?

8. Are you free to play table tennis now?

Read the letters and complete them.

Keys:

1. Are you free/ Would you like;

2. Would you like/Are you free to go/howabout;

3. Can you/why don’t we....

Write the letter:

Dear Lam,

We have not met since your moved. I miss

you a lot. We are both having some days off

between the two terms soon. If you haven’t

made any other plans, why don’t we spend a

weekend together?

Do you feel like visiting the forest near my

grandparents’ home again? It looks quite

different now because very many young

trees have been planted at the Tree-planting

Festival.

Do come if you find it possible and I will

make all the preparation then.

Give my love to your parents.

Your friend,Nam

Look at the writing and correct it.

S work individually and in groups to correct

mistakes. 

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 119: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 119/189

 

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Period 64 : Language FocusDate : January 15

th, 2010

A. OBJECTIVE 

By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to recognize an pronounce two sounds:/ b/and /p/ and to use the passive voice and p[practice reading, speaking, listening, writing

skills

B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching. 

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

I. WARM UP:

Jumbled sentences.1,back/bed/brought/big/breakfast/

Bernie/a/to/the.

->Bernie brought a big breakfast back to the

bed.

2,put/purple/pool/the/paint/in/Pat.

->Pat put purple paint in the pool.

-T presents how to pronunce 2 sounds /b/ /p?

II. PRESENTATION Pronunciation 

1. Listen and repeat

-T reads or plays the tape once and asks s to

repeat.

-T calls some s to practice

-T gets them to find out the words that have

these sounds.

2. Practice the sentences:

T plays tape one or two times and get s to

listen.

-T calls s to practice in pairs

-T gets them to find out the words that have

these sounds.

S close the book.

-S work in groups

S listen and repeat

-S practice

-S find out.

S listen and practice in pairs. 

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 120: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 120/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES 

The passive voice.

-T asks s to retell the form of the passive.

BE + PAST PARTICIPLE

-In the passive voice, the object of the active

sentence become the subject of the passive

voice.

-T asks s to do exercises.Exercise 1

T explains the exercise

T goes around to help them

T calls some s to go the board to do exercises

and then T checks and corrects mistakes.

Exercise 2

T explains how to do

T calls s to go the board to do exersises.

T checks and gives feedback.

find out the mistakes in the followingsentences and correct them. (T gives s

handout)

Exercise 3:

Has the Ss read the conversation andconplete the spaces by using the words in the

box.

Goes around the class to help and check the

Ss’ work.

Ask the Ss to read their answer in front of the

class.

III. HOMEWORK 

Rewrite the sentences 

Look at the examples and tell the rule

Keys:

1.were reported

2. grow

3. be spoken

4. am not visited

5. are being built

Keys:

1,came had started-were

2,is standing- is being photographed

3,Have been told

4,was being laid-decided

5,will be planted

-T asks s to do exercise 3

Keys:

1.  was organized

2.  arrived

3.  were met

4.  taken

5.  had been cleaned

6.  had been put

7.  was

8.  prepared

9.  made

10. were served

UNIT 10 CONSERVATION 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 121: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 121/189

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK

Period 65 : Reading Date: ........................

A. OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to understand the content of the text

and use the new words, know about the use of the national parks, have responsible to protect

the national parks and improve reading skill.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP:

The teacher asks the students look   at

the picture

on the board and answer the questions

1. What can you see in these pictures?

2. Where can they co-exit (or livetogether)? In the mountain or in the

national park?

T leads in new lesson: National Park.

II. PRESENTATION

Before you read:

a. Pair work: Discuss the questions

1. Name some national parks in Vietnam

you know or hear about?2. Where is Cuc Phuong national park?

3. What is the area of the rainforest in Cuc

Phuong National park?

4. When is the best time to visit Cuc

Phuong National Park?

T checks and gives feedback.

T plays tape and asks the Ss to listen

T explains some new words

b. Vocabulary:1.  locate (v) = situate

2.  orphan (v) -> Orphanage (n)

3.  contaminate (v = pollute

contamination(n)/contaminated (adj)

Look at the picture and answer the

questions:

I can see trees, plants, animals, mountains,

caves.

-They co-exit in the national park.

Answer

1.  Cuc Phuong, Cat Tien, Cat ba, U

Minh, Bach Ma, Ben En ….

2.  South west of Ha Noi

When rainy season finishes.

Read the words

Write

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 122: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 122/189

 TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

4.  zone(n) = area

5.  toxic (adj)

While you read:

Task 1: Find the word for definition:

T asks s to work in pairT calls s to go the board to write their

answer.

T checks and gives feedback  

Task 2: Answer the questions:Asks the Ss to work in group, read the

passage to get the information about threenational parks.

T goes around class to help them

T calls a representative to write main

information of the answer on the board.

T checks and gives feedback

After you read:Discuss the question:

T asks s to answer the following questions:

T goes around class to help them

T calls some pairs to practice

T corrects and gives feedback

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Read the words and find the meaning.

Pair work:Read the definitions and find the best word

to suit.

Keys:

1. establish

2. contain

3. species

4. survival

5. sub-tropical

6. contamination

Group work

S work in groups, discuss and find out the

information.

Answers:

1.  200 square kms

2.  The rain season has just finished

3.  The way to recognize the different

species of plants and animals, the

habits of animals and the way for

dependent species to survive4.  Orphaned and abandoned animals.

5.  Because of the toxic levels of

chemicals in the water.

6.  They will be killed/ destroyed.

Answer the questions in group:

Suggestions:

Cuc Phuong : To study butterflies, visit

caves, see 1000 year old tree.

-Nairobi: They go there to learn how to

recognize the different species of animals

and plants.

Prepare for Speaking lesson.

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 123: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 123/189

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK

Period 66 : Speaking 

 Date: ........................ A. OBJECTIVE: 

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to talk about an

excursion,, use conditional sentence (Type 3) to talk about things that

happened or couldn’t happen in the part.

2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about a village. Improve readingcomprehension skill by filling the chart and answering the questions in the reading.

3. Skill: Reading

B. METHODS: tegrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP:

T asks s to look at the pictures of a camping

and answer the questions:What do you think the people in the picture

are doing?

Where are they?

What did they have to prepare before

going?

Lead in new lesson

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: Matching

The T asks the Ss to look at the chart andread the sentences, combine the things in

column B and say out the sentences.

T goes around the class to explain how to

do and help them

T explains some new words.

1. go by (bus/train/coach) (example)

2. a fine (n) (translation)

3. poisoning food (explanation)

4. luggage (n) (explanation)T calls some s to do exercises

T checks and gives feedback.

The T gives the example:

Answer the questions:

They are on a picnic/ going camping.

They are in a forest.

They had to prepare food, drinks, tents,

blankets, candles or noodles…

Group work

Look at the chart, read the given

information and tell answers.

to discuss.

Keys:

1- f 5- b

2- c 6- c

3- h 7- a

4- g 8- d

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 124: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 124/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Task 2: Making sentences:

A. I heard you went by coach so most of

them got car sick

B. If we hadn’t gone by coach, they

wouldn’t have got car sick

(or if they had gone by bikes, they wouldn’thave got car sick.)

T reviews the structure of conditional

sentence (type 3) before s practice

if + S +V (past perfect)

S + would +have +pp

The T asks the Ss to practice in pair.

The T goes around the class to help the Ss

T calls some pairs to practiceT corrects mistakes.

Task 3: Pair work

Asks the Ss to practice in pairs, using the

information in task 1 and 2.

The T goes around the class to help the Ss

T calls some pairs to practice

T corrects mistakes.

Summary: Speaking practice

III. HOMEWORK

Write the sentences in the notebook.

Listen to the teacher and study the structure

Practice the sentences.

S work in group

Discuss about what you did or did not do in

the past.

Answers:2. If we had brought enough food and drink,

we wouldn’t have spent a lot of money

eating in expensive restaurants.

3. If some of us hadn’t food poisoning, we

would have enjoyed the trip.

4. If we had had raincoats, we wouldn’t have

got wet and a cold.

5. If some of us hadn’t left luggage on the

coach, we would have had clothes and

money with us.

6. If we hadn’t thrown waste in the forest, we

wouldn’t have got a fine.

7. If we had been careful when walking in

Huong Pagoda, we wouldn’t have got lost.

8. If we had stayed there more than a day, we

would have visited all the pagodas.

A.  We went by coach so most of us got

car sick.B.  If we had brought enough food and

drink, we wouldn’t have spent a lot of

money eating in expensive

restaurants.

Conditional sentences, Type 3

Tell about the things did or did not happen in

the past

Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the

information in lesson. Read about Cuc

Phuong forest

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 125: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 125/189

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK

Period 67 : Listening Date: ........................ 

A. OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to By the end of the lesson students will

be able to listen to information of Cuc Phuong National Park and do exercises by filling in

the missing information, answering questions and summarizing the main ideas.

B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP:

T asks s to write the name of some National

Park in Vietnam.

-T calls a representative of group to write

the name of National Park in VN.The groupis the winner if this group write many

name.

-T leads-in new lesson: Listening

II. PRESENTATION

I. Before you listen:

T asks Ss to answer the following

questions.

-T calls a representative of each group to

answer.-T gives feedback.

*Listening and repeat: These words and

phrases appear in the listening passage

Listen and repeat after the teacher

+flora

+attack

+fauna

+enemy

+ethnic minorityT explains the new words. 

S work in group

Keys:

1. Cat Ba

2. Cat Tien3. Cuc Phuong

4. Bach Ma

5. U Minh

Discuss and answer the questions.

Keys:

1. It is in the South West of HN

2. It contains over 200 square km ofrainforest.

3. It is the time when rainy season has

finished.

4. Butterflies, mountain, caves, 1000 year

old tree…..

S listen and repeat.

Read the words.

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 126: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 126/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

II. While you listen:

Task 1:

Fill in the missing information

-T asks s to read the exercise and guess the

words before listening

Ex: 1 ....in (year)

2 ....located. (number)3 ...nearly (number)

4 ...there are (number)

5 ...in (place)

T plays tape 2 times

T goes around class to help s

T checks and gives feedback

Task 2: Answering the questionsListen again and answer questions.

-T asks s to read the questions beforelistening

-T plays tape 2 times

-T goes around class to help them and check

-T calls some s to answer the questions.

-T asks s to talk about the special features of

Cuc Phuong National park.

III. After you listening :

T asks s to talk about the special features of

Cuc Phuong National park+ Cuc Phuong is the first...

+ It covers...

+ In 2002,nearly....

+ There are about....

+ Nguyen Hue’s army...

Summary:Listening about Cuc Phuong national park,

using information to fill in the blanks and

answer the questions

III. HOMEWORKSummarize the listening. Tell about Cuc

Phuong forest.

S read the exercise and guess the words.

-S listen 2 times and then work in pair

Keys:1. 1960

2. 160 km south west of

3. 100.000 visitor

4. 2000-450

5. Quen Voi before it made its...

1.  It belongs to three provinces: Ninh

Binh, Hoa Binh and Thanh Hoa.

2.  It is about 160 Km

3.  They come there to see the workbeing done to protect endangered

species.

4.  Nguyen Hue defeated the Qing

invaders in the spring of 1789.

5.  They live mainly on bee keeping and

farming.

S work in groupsCuc Phuong is the first national park in Viet

Nam

+ It covers 200 square km.

+ In 2002 nearly 100,000 visitors came to it.

+ There are about 200,000 different species

of flora and 450 species of fauna.

+ Nguyen Hue’s army was stationed there

before it made surprise attack on Thang long.

Prepare lesson for Writing: Read the words

and phrases to complete the letters

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 127: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 127/189

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK

Period 68 : Writing  Date: ........................

A. OBJECTIVE Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand the

structure (of a letter of acceptance or refusal) as well as express used in a letter of acceptance

or refusal, write completely a letter of acceptance or refusal.

B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP:

T gives out Ss an envelop and a stamp and

asks s.

1. What is that?

2. How often do you write it?

3. Who do you often write to?T leads-in new lesson: Writing

II. PRESENTATION

Task1:

Below are some common ways of accepting

or refusing an invitation

Read them and fill each of the notes with a

suitable expession

T asks Ss to read and distinguish the

structure when accepting or refusing theinvitation.

T goes around class to explain the new

words (if neccessary)

T calls Ss to write their answer on the

board.

T corrects and gives feedback.

T calls 3 Ss to read aloud the letters

Task 2: Rearrange the sentences to make

a letter:

T asks Ss to read the sentences in the bookand rearrange the following sentences to

make a letter.

S answer

1. It is a letter

2. Once a week (or somtimes)

3. I often write to my friends

Read the phrases and the letters.

S work in group to discuss and fill in the

blank.

Keys:

1. I’d like to (I’d love to)

2. I am sorry I cannot be (or I’d love to,

but)

3. I’d be delighted toRead the whole letters in front of the

classes.

S read the sentences in the book and

rearrange

S work in group

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 128: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 128/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T explains the new words

T goes around the class to help

T asks Ss to write completely this letter

Askts two Ss to read the letter

Task 3: Write a letter:

T asks s to write a reply letter accepting or

declining his/her invitation

Let the Ss find the structure of the letter:

Accepting letter: The phrases of accepting in

task 1

Refusing letter: The phrases of refusing in

task 1

T goes around the class to help them

T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to write

their letter on the board.

After you write:T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes and

gives marks

Summary: 

Write an accepting or refusing letter.III. HOMEWORK

Summarize the reading passage.

Keys:

1. d 2. e 3. c

4. a 5. f 6. b

Read the letter and find the phrases of

acception.

Greeting

Body

Conclusion

Ending

Group work:

Discuss to write the letter

Write the letter:

1. Accepting letter

Dear……I am very happy to get your invitation to go

for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park

next week. You know, I have been looking

forward to going there but I have not got a

chance. I would really like to come. I will

meet you at your home at seven o’lock.

Thankyou very much for your invitation. See

you on Sunday

Your friend,

Lan

2. Refusing letter

Dear……

I am very happy to get your invitation to go

for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park

next week. You know, I have been looking

forward to going there but I have not got a

chance. I wish I would go with next week

but I have to go with my parents to see my

grandparents in the home village. Thankyouvary much for inviting me.

See you on Sunday

Your friend,

Lan

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 129: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 129/189

Page 130: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 130/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

2. What would have happened if you hadn’t

gone to school yesterday?

T asks: What grammtical point we are

going to learn today?

-T presents the conditional sentence ( type

3 ):Untrue condition in the past.

Ex: if you had driven carefully, youwouldn’t have had an accident.

Exercise1: Complete the following

sentences, using the correct form of the

verbs in brackets:

T goes around class to help them

T gives example

I would have sent you a postcard if I had

had your dress

T calls some s to give their answerT corrects and gives feedback.

Exercise 2Write a sentences with if for each situation:

T explains how to do.

T goes around class to help s.

T asks some to tell their sentences.

Exercise 3:

Make conditional sentences:Asks the Ss to use given information to

make sentences.

Let the Ss to work in pairs.

The T goes around the class to help them.

Aks some to say their answer.

Summary:

Conditional sentences

III. HOMEWORK

Write the exercises in the notebooks.

Listen to the teacher

Yes, I did/No I didn’t 

Conditional sentences, type 3

Form:

If + S + V(past perfect)

S + would + have +pp

S do exercise

-S work in pairs 

Read the sentences and complete the spaces

Keys:1. had known 6. had known

2. had had 7. had stopped

3. would have gone 8. had called

4. would have had

5. could have enjoyed.

Make sentences, using coditional sentences,type 3.

Group work

Keys:

1. If the driver in front hadn’t stopped so

suddenly, the accidents wouldn’t have

happened.

2. If I hadn’t known that Lam had to get up

early, I wuold have woken him up.

3. If Hoa hadn’t lend me the money, I

wouldn’t have been able to buy the car.

Type 3, unreal present

Prepare for new lesson: Test yourself D

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 131: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 131/189

  Period 70 : Test yourself D Date: ........................ 

A. OBJECTIVE Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to

Consolidate skills and knowledge studied in Units 9,10 and 11.

Remark and take notes to have the experience.

B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. listening

T asks s to read the questions before listening.

T explains the new words (if neccessary)

T plays the tape 3 times

T asks s to work in pair and discuss to answer

questions.

T calls some s to answe4 the questionsT corrects and gives feedback.

II. reading

2. T asks s to read the passage

T explains some new words.

management (n)-explanation

playground (n)-explanationinfluence(v)- example

2. T asks s to find the words or phrases which

mean following and decide whether the

following statements are T or F

T goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussing

T goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussing.

T corrects and gives feedback

S listen to the T and answer.

S read the questions

-S work in pair, listen, discuss and

answer the questions.

Keys:

1. They go to a national park to enjoynature.

2. It became a national park in 1812

3. No, it isn’t. It is the world’s largest

park

4. It has about to guess

5. They must not pick the flowers, feed

or hunt the animals.

Read the reading passage.

S work in group and discuss

Keys:

1.  a. junk and litter

b. landscap

c. high way

d. healthy

2. a. T

b. T

c. F

d. F

e.T

f. T

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 132: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 132/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

III. Grammar

T asks s to put the verbs in brackets in the

correct form.

-T calls s to talk before the class

-T corrects and gives feedback

IV.writing

T asks s to complete the invitation letterbelow, using the words and phrases given

cues.

- T calls a S to write the letter on the board

and then other s comment.

-S corrects mistakes

Summary:

Test yourself:

III. HOMEWORK

Write the exercises in the notebooks.

S work in pairs to discuss about the answer.

Keys:

a. has been cleaned

have been turned on

are waiting

b. knew....would help...knowsc. decided...to stay

would have gone out...

hadn’t been

S work in group

One S goes to the blackboard to write the

letter

Write the letter of invitation:Suggested answer:

Dear Alex, You will be happy to know

Father is giving a party to celebrate the New

Year. He has invited some of our relatives

and his friends to make theparty a success.

I have invited a number of my friends in the

neibourhood. Mother has asked me to tell

you to come home for the New Year

celebration.

I’m suer you will be here in time to shre thefun with us on that day.

Love,

Helen

Listening, reading, writing, grammar.

Prepare for new lesson: Test 45min.

UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 133: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 133/189

UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 72 : Reading

 Date:  …………………………….

A. OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to understand and talk about the

importance of music in our life,use the new words, listen and write about a famous

composer of Viet Nam

B. METHODS: ntergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Asks s to look at 3 pictures in text book .

a.What do the people in the pictures do?

b.What kind of music does she play in the

first picture?

c.What banks in the second picture?

d. What kind of music do they play?

II. PRESENTATION

Before you read:

Net work.

Give a poster in which.

1..........is traditional soups of a country.

2. .........is a style of music with a strong and

loud beat.

3. ......... is a modern music that is popular

with young people.

4. ......... is combination of African and

western music.

5. .......... is serious and traditional Western

European music.+Asks s to complete.

Open their book and answer.

-They play...

-Folk music.

-Rock’n roll.

+List

-Folk music

-Pop music

-Jazz music

-Classical music

complete the sentences in the net

1. Folk music

2.Rock’n roll music

3. Pop music

4. Jazz music

5. Classical music

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

music

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 134: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 134/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

While you read:

Task 1: Find the word for definition:

Let s listen to the tape carefully.

-Asks s to find out the words which have in

the box.

Asks Ss to read the sentences and complete.

Calls s to read their exercise.

Corrects (if neccessary)

Task 2: Answer the questions:

Asks the Ss to work in group, read the

passage to get the information.Answer the

questions.

Asks Ss to read the questions

Calls Ss to work in pair

T goes around class to help them

T calls a representative to write main

information of the answer on the board.

T checks and gives feedback

After you read:

Discuss the question:

T asks s to answer the following questions:

T goes around class to help them

T calls some pairs to practice

T corrects and gives feedback

IV. HOMEWORK Summarize the reading passage.

listen to the tape carefully and repeat silently

Work in pair

Compare and copy the key down.

Keys: 1. communicate

2. lull

3. delight

4. intergral part

5. soleum

6. emotion

7. mournful

Read the questions then read the passage

again and answer by themselves

Keys:1.  language and music

2.  It can express ideas, thoughts and

feelings

3.  It adds yoyfulness to the atmosphere

of a festival and made a funeral more

solemn and mournful/

4.  It makes people happy and excited. Its

delights the sence.

5.  It is a billion-dollar industry.

Pair work work

S work in pairs, discuss and find out the

information.

Answers:

1.  Five roles

2.  The 1st 

3. 

The 2

nd

…..

Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 135: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 135/189

UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 73 : Speaking

 Date:  …………………………….

A. OBJECTIVE: 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to talk about the

favorite music, the reason and singer, compare one’s hobby and others, and

pronunciate correctly

B. METHODS:  Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE: 

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

i.  WARM UPT asks Ss to to close the book.

-asks s to listen music in the song

“Yesterday”-asks s to answer the questions.

1.What song is it?

2.Who sings this song?

3. Do you like this boy band?

Lead in new lesson

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: Matching

The T asks the Ss to read the paragraph,

gives the requirement of exercise.

Note: The main words in the sentences.

Eg: cheer (someone) up

keep (someone) happy

have the radio on

be easy to listen

Asks the Ss to work in pairs

T checks Ss’answers.

Has the Ss to tell their answers

Task 2:

-T writes down the suggested words .

-T asks ss to work in pair and makequestions.

Rousing/lyrical/serene and peaceful/

pleasant

Help (sb) forget troubles

Make (sb) feel relaxed

Answer the questions:

Work individually and answer the

questions.

It is “Yesterday”

The Bettles

Yes, I do

Ss work in pair and finish the task of

exercise.

Ss practice reading conversation in pair

Ss practice making questions and

answering.

Answers:

1.  She likes pop music.

2.  Because it keeps her happy.

3.  The Backstreet Boys.

4.  All the time

Close the book.

Ss work in pair.

Answer.

A. What kind of music do you like?

B.  I like …………..

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 136: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 136/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

The Ss to tell their ideas about :

Kind of music

Favourite band or singer.

Favourite song.

The time to listen to music.

The reason to listen to music.

Task 3: Telling your friend’s ideas:

Asks the Ss to tell their friends’ ideas

Summary: Speaking practice

IV. HOMEWORK: Write a paragraph of about 50 words about

music in the notebook.

Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the

sentences in task 2

……… Folk music

Rock’n roll music

Pop music

Jazz music

Classical music

A. Why do you like it?

B. 

Because it is rousingLyrical

serene and peaceful

pleasant

2. A. What is your favourite band?

B. I like ………..

A. Why do you like it ?

B. Because……………..

3. A. When do you usually listen to music?

B. I usually listen when I am free/ after

work/ in the evening……4. A. What is the reasons for listening to

music?

B. I listen to music for relaxing…….

Tell the ideas you hear:

1.  Nam likes classical music because it

is serene and peaceful.

2.  Both An and Hoa like pop music

because it makes them excited.

3.  Lan likes rock and rolls because it is

rousing4.  Thanh likes Backtreet Boy because

they are a good band.

5.  Tam like Hong Nhung because she

sings beautifully.

6.  Every body likes music

Write homework

Prepare for new lesson: Listening:

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 137: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 137/189

UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 74 : Listening 

 Date:  …………………………….

A. OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and choose the true and false

information, ask and answer the information, summarize the main ideas and practice skills of

talking and writing.

B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

i.  WARM UP

*Play game: Net work

-what kind of music do you know?

-T leads-in new lesson: Listening

II. PRESENTATION

Before you listen:

Vocabulary

-write some adj on board

Rousing

Lyrical

serene and peaceful

pleasant

sweet

gentle

exciting..Asks the Ss to read the adj.

Ask s to open the book to selects some adj

to describle Van Cao’s music.

Play the tape or pronounce adj above.

find down some kinds of music

-go to board and write down

copy down

S listen and repeat.

Read the words.

Select the adj

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

pop azz

Music

rock folk

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 138: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 138/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

Aasks s to work in groups then ask your

partner questions to get information to

complete the table below using suitable adj

While you listen:

Task 1: T/F statementsSets situations and explains the way how to

do.

Pays the tape.

Asks s who can answer?

Plays the tape again

Asks to work individually then discuss

Checks the answer

Plays the tape once more

Stops playing the tape at the correct

sentence.

Task 2: Answering the questionsSets situations and explains the way how to

do.

Plays the tape

Asks Ss who can answer?

Plays the tape again

Asks to work in pairs and answer the

questions.

After you listening :T asks s to talk about Quang Hung’s ideas

Van Cao music.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some Ss to tell their ideas.

Summary:

Listening about Van Cao, one of the most

talented musician in Viet Nam. 

IV. HOMEWORK: Summarize the listening. Tell about Van Cao

music.

Work in pairs.

Select the adj which suit the songs.

Keys:

1. Ngay mua->sweet,gentle, exciting

2. Truong Chi:->lyrical

3. Ben Xuan:-> sweet,gentle,lyrical4. Mua Xuan dau tien:exciting,lyrical

5. Truong ca song lo:rousing,solemn

Listen to the tapes

Choose true/false

Work individual and in pairs

Answers:

1.F 2.F

3.T 4.F 5.F

Listen and answer

Listen to the tape

Work in pairs and answer

Keys

1.  It is “ My favourite musician”

2.  Tien Quan Ca.

3.  It is hard and solemn, it makes him

feel great and proud of his country.

Quang hung thinks Van Cao’ music is sweet

and gentle. Sometimes they are lyrical. Tien

Quan Ca is hard and solemn.

I agree with him

I don’t agree with him.

Prepare lesson for Writing: Read the words

and phrases to complete the letters

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 139: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 139/189

UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 75 : Writing 

 Date:  …………………………….

A. OBJECTIVE: Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand write

about a famous person’s background, write about an American musician and a well-known

musician in Vietnam.

B. METHODS:  Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching. 

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

T gives out Ss an envelop and a stamp and

asks s.

1. What is that?

2. How often do you write it?3. Who do you often write to?

T leads-in new lesson: Writing

II. PRESENTATION

Task1:

Below are some common ways of accepting

or refusing an invitation

Read them and fill each of the notes with a

suitable expession

T asks Ss to read and distinguish the

structure when accepting or refusing the

invitation.

T goes around class to explain the new

words (if neccessary)

T calls Ss to write their answer on the

board.

T corrects and gives feedback.

T calls 3 Ss to read aloud the letters

Task 2: Rearrange the sentences to make

a letter:

T asks Ss to read the sentences in the bookand rearrange the following sentences to

make a letter.

S answer

1. It is a letter

2. Once a week (or somtimes)

3. I often write to my friends

Read the phrases and the letters.

S work in group to discuss and fill in the

blank.

Keys:

1. I’d like to (I’d love to)

2. I am sorry I cannot be (or I’d love to,

but)

3. I’d be delighted to

Read the whole letters in front of the

classes.

S read the sentences in the book and

rearrangeS work in group

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 140: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 140/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

T explains the new words

T goes around the class to help

T asks Ss to write completely this letter

Askts two Ss to read the letter

Task 3: Write a letter:

T asks s to write a reply letter accepting ordeclining his/her invitation

Let the Ss find the structure of the letter:

Accepting letter: The phrases of accepting in

task 1

Refusing letter: The phrases of refusing in

task 1

T goes around the class to help them

T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to write

their letter on the board.

After you write:

T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes andgives marks

Summary: Write an accepting or refusing letter.

IV. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Keys:

1. d 2. e 3. c

4. a 5. f 6. b

Read the letter and find the phrases of

acception.

GreetingBody

Conclusion

Ending

Group work:

Discuss to write the letter

Write the letter:

1. Accepting letterDear……

I am very happy to get your invitation to gofor a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park

next week. You know, I have been looking

forward to going there but I have not got a

chance. I would really like to come. I will

meet you at your home at seven o’lock.

Thankyou very much for your invitation. See

you on Sunday

Your friend,

Lan

2. Refusing letter

Dear……

I am very happy to get your invitation to go

for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park

next week. You know, I have been looking

forward to going there but I have not got a

chance. I wish I would go with next week

but I have to go with my parents to see my

grandparents in the home village. Thankyou

vary much for inviting me.

See you on Sunday

Your friend,

Lan

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 141: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 141/189

UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 76 : Language focus 

 Date:  …………………………….

A. OBJECTIVE: Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand

recognize an pronounce two sounds:/ s / and /z/, review the use of “to infinitive” and “wh-

questions, practise reading, speaking, listening, writing, the impotance of music and use the

new words, talk and ask,answer about activities.

B. METHODS:  Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching. 

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. 

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Listen and gives correct answers: /s/:1, /z/:2Play the tapes.

1.Susan loves classical music

1 2 2 1 2

2.I like to listen to Jazz records

1 2 2

Lead to new lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Pronunciation

T presents 2 sounds /s/, /z/

1. Has s open their book

Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to two

consonants /s/ and /z/.

Asks them to repeat

Asks some Ss to read

corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly

between /s/ and /z/.

2. Lets them work in pair and practice six

sentences in the book, page 130.

Help s read them correctly word by word andthen read the whole sentence.

3. Practice these sentences.

T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words

containing the sound /s/, /z/

S listen to the T and answer.The sounds /s/ and /z/

Number the sounds

Listen to the tape and repeat.

Stand up and read.

Pay attention to the teacher

Ss work in pairs

Practice all those sentences

Read word by word and then read whole

sentence.

S listen and repeat the words

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 142: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 142/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

T calls some Ss to read that sentences.

T corrects pronunciation.

2. Grammar

1.To infinitive

Exercise1:Asks s to use the words in brackets to

answer the questions. 

+what do you listen to music for?

(feel relaxed)

->To feel relaxed, I listen to music.

or: I listen to music to feel relaxed

Asks them to do the exercise individual

first and then work in group to discuss

correct answer.

Checks and gives correct answers.Exercise2.

Asks s to complete each sentence with the

right form of a suitable verb.

Gives a model sentence.

we are having a party...

Ann’s birthday -> we are having a party to

celebrate Ann’s birthday.

Asks them to work individually and

then work in groups to discuss right

answer.Goes around class to help if possible.

Checks and gives correct answers.

Exercise3:

Has Ss to put questions for the underlined

words/phrases

Gives a model first

I often listen to music whenever I have free

time.

When do you listen to music?

Asks Ss to work individually then work ingroups.

Checks and gives correct answer

Summary:

IV. HOMEWORK: Write the exercises in the notebooks.

Do as teacher request.

Work in group and discuss.

Use a suitable verb to complete each

sentence.Keys:

1.  I phoned her to tell her the good

news.

2.  I’m saving money to buy a cassette

player. 

3.  She practises singing all day to win

the singing contest.

4.  I’m learning French to sing …

5.  The monitor always goes to class on

time to test… Do as teacher request.

Work in group and discuss.

Use a suitable verb to complete each

sentence.

Keys:

1.  to read

2.  to buy

3.  to post

4.  to invite

5.  to learn 

Keys:

1.  What will you do if it rains?

2.  What sorts of music does….?

3.  When did he leave ……..…?

4.  Who wants to talk to you?

5.  How did you ………………?

6.  When does the film start?

7.  Who is your favourite musician?

8. 

Why do you like pop music?

To infinitives

Wh- questions

Prepare for lesson 13

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 143: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 143/189

Period 70 : Test yourself D

 Date:  ………………

A. OBJECTIVE: Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to

Consolidate skills and knowledge studied in Units 9,10 and 11.

Remark and take notes to have the experience.

B. METHODS:  Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching. C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

I. LISTENING

T asks s to read the questions before listening.

T explains the new words (if neccessary)

T plays the tape 3 times

T asks s to work in pair and discuss to answerquestions.

T calls some s to answe4 the questions

T corrects and gives feedback.

II. REEADING

2. T asks s to read the passage

T explains some new words.management (n)-explanation

playground (n)-explanation

influence(v)- example

2. T asks s to find the words or phrases which

mean following and decide whether the

following statements are T or F

T goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussingT goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussing.

T corrects and gives feedback

S listen to the T and answer.

S read the questions

-S work in pair, listen, discuss and

answer the questions.Keys:

1. They go to a national park to enjoy

nature.

2. It became a national park in 1812

3. No, it isn’t. It is the world’s largest

park

4. It has about to guess

5. They must not pick the flowers, feed

or hunt the animals.

Read the reading passage.S work in group and discuss

Keys:

1.  a. junk and litter

b. landscap

c. high way

d. healthy

2. a. Tb. T

c. F

d. F

e.T

f. T

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 144: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 144/189

 TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES  STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES

III. GRAMMAR

T asks s to put the verbs in brackets in the

correct form.

-T calls s to talk before the class

-T corrects and gives feedback

IV. WRITING

T asks s to complete the invitation letterbelow, using the words and phrases given

cues.

- T calls a S to write the letter on the board

and then other s comment.

-S corrects mistakes

Summary:

Test yourself:

HOMEWORK 

Write the exercises in the notebooks.

S work in pairs to discuss about the answer.

Keys:

a. has been cleaned

have been turned on

are waiting

b. knew....would help...knowsc. decided...to stay

would have gone out...

hadn’t been

S work in group

One S goes to the blackboard to write the

letter

Write the letter of invitation:Suggested answer:

Dear Alex, You will be happy to know

Father is giving a party to celebrate the New

Year. He has invited some of our relatives

and his friends to make theparty a success.

I have invited a number of my friends in the

neibourhood. Mother has asked me to tell

you to come home for the New Year

celebration.

I’m suer you will be here in time to shre thefun with us on that day.

Love,

Helen

Listening, reading, writing, grammar.

Prepare for new lesson: Test 45min.

UNIT 12 MUSIC

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 145: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 145/189

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 78 : Reading

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand the content of the text

and use the new words and the important role of cinema in our life, talk and ask, answer

about activities of the brief history of cinema.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

T shows a photo of a local cinema and ask s

questions.

1.What is it?

2. Have you ever been here?3.What do you come here for?

4.What film did you see?

5.What kind of film is it?

II. PRESENTATION

Before you read:Ask s to work in groups to match the titles

of the films (column A) and the kinds of the

films (column B)

A B1.Tom and Jerry a. comedies

2.Sherlock Holmes b. war films

3. Dien Bien Phu c. sciencwe fiction

4. Charlie chaplin d. cartoons

5. Stars war e. detectives

6. Titanic f. action films

7. Kung-Fu g. Love stories

8. Dracular h. Horrors

Check the answers of the groups and give

feedback.Ask s to repeat the kinds of films (in

English)

Ask Ss to open their books and silently read

the text following to the cassette.

Look at the photo and answer the

questions.

Answers may vary

Ss do the task and give their answers.

Copy the answers on their notebooks1. d 5. c

2. e 6. g

3. b 7. f

4. a 8. h

Repeat after the teacher

Work in pairs to do the task.

Read the text following to the cassette

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 146: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 146/189

 TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Vocabulary:

cinema (n)-give examples

still (adj) –explain

movement (n)-show an action

character (n)-explain

play (adv)-explainHave the Ss read the words.

While you read:

Task 1: Find the word for definition:

Asks Ss to find the words in the passage that

can match with the definition on the right

column

Help Ss and check their answers.

Task 2: Answer the questions:Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs to

answer the questions in task 2-textbook.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of

the class.

Task : Find the title for the reading

passage

Asks s to work in group and choose the best

title for the passage.

Help s and check their answers.

T goes around class to help them

T asks the Ss to say their answer.

After you read:Ask the Ss to summarize the text

T goes around class to help them

T calls some pairs to practice

T corrects and gives feedback

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Look at their books and repeat after the

cassette once.

-Take note and repeat the words after the

teacher.

Do the task in pairs.

Give cprrect answers

Keys:

1.  cinema

2.  sequence

3.  decade

4.  rapidly

5.  scence6.  character

Read the reading passage, then work in pairs

to ask and answer the questions.

Keys:

1. The history of cinema began in the earlt

19th

 century.

2. At that times scientists discovered that

when a sequence of still pictures were set in

motion, they could give the feeling ofmovement.

3. No, they didn’t.

4. Audiences were able to see long films in

the early 1910s

5. The sound was introduced at the end of

the 1920s.

6. As the old silent films were being replaced

by spoken ones, the musical cinema

appeared.

Work in group to summsrize the text

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.

Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 147: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 147/189

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 79 : Speaking

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to make

questions the information about their preferences for films, talk about different types of

films and pronunciate correctly.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Asks s to close your books and look at the

chart. Name some kinds of film you have

learnt in reading.

-How much do you like each kind of film?Why?

T leads in new lesson: Speaking

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: Tick your choice

Asks s to look at the table and work with

your partner. Put a tick (v) in the right

column. Then compare your answer with

your partner.

Asks some pairs to speak their ideas andpartners about kinds of film mentioned in

the table before the class.

Ex. I like science films very much

Ss go to the board and do as direct.

Cartoon

FictionDetective

Horror

Thriller…

Very much/ not muchThey are exciting/ funny/ happy….

Work in pairs. Each s puts a tick in the

right column. Then compare.

Express their ideasThe answers may be different.

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

Film

fictioncartoon

horrordetectiv

thriller

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 148: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 148/189

Page 149: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 149/189

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 80 : Listening 

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and

understand the information about the plan in the next week of Lan Huong, fill in the

information in the blank and summarize the main ideas, practice skills of talking and

writing.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.WARM UPT asks s to close the book and work in

groups to write down some activities in

free time.*Things to do in free time.

T checks before the class.

T calls s to answer.

T lead-in Things to do in our free time.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Before you listen:

Activity 1:

T asks s to open the book and fill in things

to do in free time in the chartT gives questions and asks s to answer.

Activity 2:

T asks s to listen and repeat the words in

listen and repeat.

Titanic

cinema

instead

suppose

guesspicnic

2. While you listen:

Task 1: What are they planning to do?

T gives situations and explains

Ss work in groups.

Ss answer.

Going shoppingWatching TV

Reading books

Listen to music …

S open the book and fill

-S answer.

I often/ always/ never go to the cinema(

watch T.V, listen to the radio, go dancing,

cat on the net…)

Listen to the teachers and repeat the

words.

S listen and repeat.

Read the words.

Plans for the whole week.

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 150: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 150/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T asks s to listen to the first time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.

Task 2: Answering the questionsT gives situations and explains

T asks s to look at the calendar and listen to

the first time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

T pauses to checks answer.

Task 3: Comparing the answer

T asks Ss to compare their answer with the

classmate.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

3.  After you listen :T gives situations and explains

T asks s to work in groups to talk again

about the plan of Lan and Huong in next

week .

Summary:

Listening the plan of Lan and Huong in next

week .

III. HOMEWORK: Write about Lan and Huong plan next week.

Tell the timme they can go to the cinema

together.

T asks s to rewrite your plan in week.

Prepare for new lesson:

Ss listen and take notes

the activities of Lan and Huong

Listen and answer

Listen to the tape

Work in pairs and answer: They are going tosee the film Titanic together.

Ss look at the chart and take notes.

Mon: Lan is seeing a play in the morning

Tue. They are free

Wed. Huong is working and going to the

singing club

Thur. Lan is visit her granparents in the

morning

Fri. Huong is studying ChineseSat. Lan is working

Sun. Huong is going on a picnic.

Ss look at the chart to check the answer.

Ss compare their answer with the classmate.

Aswer:

They can meet on Tuesday.

Work in group and talk about Lan and

Huong plan

S listen to the T and take notes.

Read the description of the film Titanic, then

use structure to write about a film you have

ever seen

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 151: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 151/189

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 81 : Writing

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to widen their

knowledge of film and music, improve writing and speaking skills.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

Play the game:

Guessing the name of a film.

-T asks s to go to the board and tell the

content of a film . She (he) has just watched

without mentioning its name. The others

guess its name.T leads-in new lesson: Writing

II. PRESENTATION

Discussion

T asks s to discuss about the picture in their

book.

In what film does the ship appear?

Who are they?

Matching

-T gives the poster with these words andasks s to match A and B

A B

1.liner a. thảm họa, tai họa

2.disater b. chuyến đi xa

3.iceberg c. tàu thủy

4.voyage d. núi băng trôi

Task1: Read the passage and answer the

questions.

-Asks s to read the discription of the filmTitanic and then work in pairs, answering

the questions.

-Calls some pairs to answer the questions.

Play the game.

Listen to the Teacher and guess the name

of the film

Discuss about the picture

Titanic film

They are the main characters in Titanic

film

Look at the poster to match A with B

Read the words

Read the passage and answer the

questions.

Expected answers:

1. 

Titanic2.  Love story

3.  About two lovers who first met on

board

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 152: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 152/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T elicits some questions to help and give the

outline used to describle a film.

title of film where set in

kind of film what based on

content main character

ending

Task 2: Write about a film you have seen.T devides class into 5 groups and asks each

group to give a film they like best and gets

each group discuss about the film using the

description of Titanic.

Goes around to see how Ss discuss and help

if necessary.

-Asks Ss to write about the film that they

have discussed (using poster to write)T goes around the class to help them

T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to write

their letter on the board.

After you write:

Ask s to exchange their writing to the other

groups to read and correct mistakes.

-T can choose 1 or 2 writing posters to

correct to the class.

T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes andgives marks

Summary: Write about a film you have seen. 

III. HOMEWORK: Write about a film you have seen in your

notebooks.

Prepare for new lesson: Language focus.

4.  In America

5.  On a true story of the Titanic disaster.

6.  Jack Dawson and Rose De Bukater

are.

7.  The man died from the chill, the

woman refused to marry the man she

had engaged with.8.  a sad/ unhappy ending

Ss work in groups ,discussing the film use

the description of Titanic.

Ss work in groups , writing about their film

on the poster.

1.  Recently I have seen……

2.  It is a ………….. film

3.  It is about …………..

4.  It was made in ……..

5.  It is based on ……….

6.  ……….7.  He / she is ……….

8.  ……….

Write about a film we have ever seen. 

Write homework in the notebooks

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 153: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 153/189

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 82 : Language focus

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able torecognize,

understand and pronounce two sounds:/ v / and /f /, review the use of –ed and –ing adj,

practising the structure It was not untill that ……….

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

Listen to the T and put the words in correct

group: four

EnoughVine

View

give

Lead to new lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

1. PronunciationT presents 2 sounds /f/, /v/

1. Has th Ss open their books

Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to twoconsonants /s/ and /z/.

Asks them to repeat

Asks some Ss to read

corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly

between /f/ and /v/.

2. Lets them work in pair and practice six

sentences in the book.

Help s read them correctly word by word and

then read the whole sentence.3. Practice these sentences.

T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words

containing the sound /v/, /f/

S listen to the T and answer.

Four / enough

Vine / view / give

The sounds /f/ and /v/

Listen to the tape and repeat.

Stand up and read.

Pay attention to the teacher

Ss work in pairs

Practice all those sentences

Read word by word and then read whole

sentence.

S listen and repeat the words

UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 154: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 154/189

Page 155: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 155/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Period 83 : Reading Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matching

the column, scan for specific information by gap-fill and decide True or False statement.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UPAsks the Ss to answer the questions:

What colour of these national football

teams?

England?

Brazil?

France?Viet Nam?

Ireland

II. PRESENTATION

I.  Before you read:

Ask s to work in groups to answer the

questions.

Give some more questions.

Who is the man with the cup?What his number?

Vocabulary:Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then show

the new words.

Explain new words:

Passionate(adj) -> passion

Witness (v)

champion(n) -> championship (n)

compete (v) -> competitiongovern(v) -> government (n)

title(n)

honour (adj)

Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus and

individually.

Answers the teachar’s questions:

White

Yellow and green

BlueRed

Green

Ss do the task and give their answers.

1.  In Japan and Korea.

2.  Brazil

3.  Germany

He is Cafu, the captain of Brazil

Number two.

Look at their books and repeat after the

cassette once.

Take note and repeat the words after the

teacher.

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 156: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 156/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

II. While you read:

Task 1: Matching A with B

Let the Ss read the words and combine them.

Task 2: Fill in the blanks:

Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs to

complete the gaps

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of

the class.

Task : True / false statementsAsks s to work in group and choose the best

choice for the statements.

T goes around class to help them

T asks the Ss to say their answer.

III. After you read:

Ask the Ss to talk about the mentioned events

T goes around class to help them

T calls some pairs to practice

T corrects and gives feedback

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Read the reading passage and give correct

answer.

Keys:

1-  b

2-  c3-  a

4-  e

5-  d

Read the reading passage, then work in pairs

to fill in the blanks

Expected answers:

1.  13

2.  323.  Argentina

4.  one

5.  26

Work in pair to choosee T or F

Expected answers:

1. F ( 1930)

2. F (4 years)

3. T

4. T5. F (5 times)

1.  the year when FIFA was set up

2.  The number of teams taking part in 1st 

W.C

3.  The year of 1st WC

4.  The number of WCT by 2002

5.  The year when Wcwas held jointly

Work in group to summsrize the text

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.

Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 157: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 157/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Period 84 : Speaking 

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to make

questions and answer about the World Cup and about the World Cup winners.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Asks s to close their books names some

national teams which came to Korea and

Japan to join final round of 2002 World

Cup.

T leads in new lesson: Speaking

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: International football team

Asks s to look at the picture and work with

their partner. Tell the name of the teams

and any thing they know about them.

Asks some pairs to tell their answer.

Task 2: The World Cup1. T asks some pairs to read aloud the

dialogue model.

T asks Ss to work in pairs.

2. The T asks the Ss to look at the table of

the World Cup and use the information to

make diologue about them.

Ss go to the board and do as direct.

Brazil

England

Germany

FranceItalia

…………..

The national teams which came to Korea

and Japan to join final round of 2002

World Cup:

England

France

ItaliaGermany

Look at the table.

Ask and answer about the World Cup.

A.  Where was the 2nd

 WC held?

B.  It was held in Italy

A.  Which team played in the final

match?

B.  Italy and CzechoslovakiaA. Which team became tha champion?

B. Italy

A. What was the score of the match?

B. 2-1

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 158: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 158/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Task 3: Telling about the winners of WC:Asks the Ss to read the example, then use the

information in the chart to tell about world

cup winners.

Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.T asks some pairs to tell their work in front

of the class.

1.  The first World Cup

2.  The second World Cup

3.  The third World Cup

4.  The fourth World Cup

5.  The six World Cup

6.  The 16th World Cup

7.  The 17th World Cup

Summary: Speaking practice

Making questions and answer about the

World Cup and about the World Cup

winners.

III. HOMEWORK: Write task 3 in your notebook

Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the

sentences in listening lesson.

Ss listen to the teacher.

Ss work in groups.

Ss make similar dialogues using the

information in the chart

1. The second World Cup was held in Italyin 1934. The final match was between Italy

and Czechoslovakia. Italy defeated

Czechoslovakia by 2 to 1.

2. The third World Cup was held in Italy

1938. The final match was between Italy and

Hungary . Italy defeated Hungaryby 4 to 2.

3. The fourth World Cup was held in Brazil

in 1938. The final match was between Brazil

and Uruguay. Uruguay Brazil by 2 to 1.

4. The fifth World Cup was held inSwitzeland in 1950. The final match was

between West Germany and Hungary. West

Germany defeated Hungary by 3 to 2.

5. The sixth World Cup was held in Sweden

in 1954. The final match was between Brazil

and Sweden. Brazil defeated Sweden by 5 to

12

6. The sixteenth World Cup was held in

France in 1998. The final match wasbetween Brazil and Brazil. France defeated

Brazil by 3 to 0

7. The seventeenth World Cup was held in

South Korea and Japan in 2002. . The final

match was between Brazil and Germany.

Brazil defeated Germany by 2 to 0

Write homework

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 159: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 159/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 85 : Listening

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and

understand the information about Pele, one of the most talanted fooballer in the world, fill

in the chart and answer the questions about himB. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

the book and work in groups to write down

some famous footballers in the world

T calls Ss to answer.

T lead-in listening lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Before you listen:

Activity 1:

T asks s to open the book, work in group ,

look at the picture and answer the

questions.

Who are they?

Who do you like best?

Why do you like him?T gives questions and asks s to answer.

Activity 2:

T asks s to listen and repeat the words in

listen and repeat.

Goal – score hero ambassador

Brazil kicking retirement

Promotion championship

2. While you listen:

Task 1: Filling the chartT asks the Ss to listen to the tapes and fill in

the chart information about Pele, a famous

Brazilian football player

Ss work in groups.

Pele

Charton Bobby

Klingsman

Van BastenRonaldo

Look at the picture, work in group and

asnwer the questions

Expected answers:

They are Pele (Brazil)

Maradona (Brazil)Didan (France0

Bathez (France)

David Beckham (England)

I like …. best because he is a talanted

players.

Listen to the teachers and repeat the

words.

S listen and repeat.

Read the chart.Listen and fill in the chart

Ss listen and take notes

Tell their answer.

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 160: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 160/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T asks s to listen to the first time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.

Task 2: Answering the questionsT gives situations and explains

T asks Ss to look at the chart, then listen to

the first time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second timeT checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

T pauses to checks answer.

3.  After you listen :

T gives situations and explains

T asks Ss to to work in groups to talk about

the milestones in Pele’s life

Summary:

Listening about Pele, one of the most famous

footballer in the world.

III. HOMEWORK:Prepare for new lesson:

Expected answers:

1.  1940

2.  Joined a Brazilian football club

3.  1962

4.  1974

5.  retiredSs look at the chart and take notes.

Ss look at the chart to check their answer.

Ss listen to the tapes and answer the

questions.

Expexted answers:

1.  As a football player, Pele was famous

for his powerful kicking and

controlling the ball

2.  He participated in three World Cup.3.  He played for an Americanfootball

club before he retired.

4.  He became an interenational

ambassador for the sport, working to

promote peace and understangding

through friendly sport activities.

Ss compare their answer with the classmate.

Work in groups to talk about the milestones

in Pele’s life

Pele is one of the greatest footballer in the

world. He was born in 1940 in Brazil. As a

football player, he was famous for his

powqerful kicking and controlling the ball.

He participated in three World Cup in 1958,

1962 and 1970. By 1974, hw had scored

1,200 goals and became a Brazilian hero. He

played for an American football club before

he retired in 1977. He became an an

interenational ambassador for the

sportworking to promote peace and

understangding through friendly sport

activities.

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 161: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 161/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 86 : Writing

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to write an

announcement by reading a sample and using given information in their book

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Asks the Ss to work in group and

answer the questions: 

Can you tell some of national football

championships?

Which team is the champion of

Premiership?

Which team is the champon of the V-

league?

II. PRESENTATION

Task1: Discussion

Read the passage and answer the questions.

T asks s to read the anouncement in theirbook and answer the questions.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks the Ss to answer in front of the class.

Correct information.

Notes:To write an announcement ( of a match),

there are some main information to pay

attention to. What are they?

Ask the Ss to give their answers

Listen to the Teacher and tell some of

national football championships:

Primiership (England)

Budesliga (Germany)_

Seria A(Italy)V-league (Viet Nam)

Man.U

Binh Duong

Read the anouncement in their book and

answer the questions.

Expected answers:

1. The national football championship

organizing committee

2. The match beetween Nam Dinh and

Binh Duong

3. Sunday, April 18th

 

4. My Dinh National Stadium

Discuss and give answer to the T’s

Questions

Who write the announcement?

What is the announcement about?

When will the event be taken place?

Where will the event be taken place?

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 162: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 162/189

Page 163: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 163/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 87 : Language focus

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able torecognize,

understand and pronounce two sounds:/ g / and / k /, review the use of Will vs Going to,

Will is used to make predictions and offers

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Listen to the T and put the words in correct

group:

Cup cinema because club

Game dog

Lead to new lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Pronunciation

T presents 2 sounds /g/, /k/

1. Has th Ss open their books

Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to two

consonants /g/ and /k/.

Asks them to repeatAsks some Ss to read

corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly

between /g/ and /k/.

2. Lets them work in pair and practice six

sentences in the book.

Help s read them correctly word by word and

then read the whole sentence.

3. Practice these sentences.T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words

containing the sound /g/, /k/

S listen to the T and answer.

The sounds /g/ and /k/

Listen to the tape and repeat.

Stand up and read.

Pay attention to the teacher

Ss work in pairs

Practice all those sentences

Read word by word and then read whole

sentence.

S listen and repeat the wordsPick out them

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 164: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 164/189

Page 165: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 165/189

UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 88 : Test yourself e

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to consolidate skills

and knowledge studied in Units 12, 13,14

Practice reading, listening skills and grammar exercises

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. Listening

T asks s to read the questions before listening.

T explains the new words (if neccessary)

T plays the tape 3 times

T asks s to work in pair and discuss to answerquestions.

T calls some s to answe4 the questions

T corrects and gives feedback.

II. Reading

T asks the Ss to read the passage 

T explains some new words.

Extra (adj) = added

Involve + v-ing

Associate (v)T asks s to work in pair to answer the

questions

T goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussing

T goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussing.

T corrects and gives feedback

III. Grammar

1.  Articles:

The T asks the Ss to use correct article to

complete the spaces: 

Ss listen to the T and answer.

Ss read the questions

Ss work in pair, listen, discuss and

answer the questions.

Keys:1. 845

2. students

3. MOUNTAIN

4. are reduced

5. 7 - 30

Read the reading passage.

S work in group and discuss

Keys:1.  She / he has to do a lot of practice

and often spends a Sartuday or

Sunday away from home.

2.  They are often played on

Sartuday and Sunday.

3.  To play against other school team

4.  No. Sometimes parents, friends

and other students will travel with

them.

5. 

The whole school does.

Expected answers:1. no article

TEST YOURSELF E

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 166: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 166/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

2.  Rewrite the sentences:

Structure to use: To + V (purpose)The T has the Ss to read the sentences, then

use To + v to rewrite them.

Asks the Ss to work in pairs

T goes around to help them

T calls s to talk before the class after

discussing.

T corrects and gives feedback

IV.writing

Writing an announcementThe T asks the Ss to read the given

information.

Disscuss the questions:

1.  Who is the announcer?

2.  What is the announcement about?

3.  Where will the musical performance

held?

4.  When will it be held?

Then asks them to write an announcement.

- T calls a S to write the letter on the boardand then other s comment.

-S corrects mistakes

Summary:

Test yourself:

IV. homework: 

Write the exercises in the notebooks.

3.  the 7. the

4.  No 8. the

5.  no 9. the

6.  the 10. a

7.  a

Expected answers:1. ………..to watch a film on television.

2. ……….. to thank them for the weekend.

3. ……….. to study engineering.

4. ……….. to improve your English.

5. ……….. to see that football match.

S work in group

The monitor of class 10G

The musical performance to raise money for

the people in flooded ares

At the School Hall

At 7.30 on Thursday.

One S goes to the blackboard to write the

anouncement.

Suggested answer:

The monitor of 10G class wishes to

announce that the musical performance of

class 10G to raise money for the people in

the flooded ares will be held at 7.30 p.m on

Thursday in the school meeting hall. The

ticket price is 5,000VND

Listening, reading, writing, grammar.

Prepare for new lesson: Test 45min.

TEST YOURSELF E

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 167: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 167/189

TEST YOURSELF E

Unit 15 cities 

Period 91 : Reading

 Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matching

the column, decide True or False statements and answer the questionsB. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

II.  Warm up Asks the Ss to work in groups and name

some cities in The USA which they

know

I. presentationII.  Before you read:

Ask s to work in groups, look at the

picture, read the names of the places, then

match them and answer the questions

Vocabulary:

Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then show

the new words.

Explain new words:

Mingle (v) = mix

Metropolitan (adj) belong to the capitalfinance(v)

characterize(v)

Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus and

individually.

II. While you read:

Task 1: Matching A with BLets the Ss work in pairs, read the words in

column A and combine with the definitions

in column B.Goes around to help the Ss

Ask the Ss tell their answers

Task 2: T or F statements:

Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs

to choose T or F

Answers the teacher’s questions:

New York

Washington

Chicago

San Francisco……………………

Match the names with the places

Expected answers:

1 – a

2 – b

3 – d

4 - c

New York is a biog city in southeast USA

There is the Statue of Liberty in the

harbour.

Take notes and read the new words.

Read the column.

Combine A with B

Expected answers:

1 – d

2 – c

3 – e4 – a

5. – b

Read the text, work in pairs to decide T or

F

Unit 15 cities 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 168: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 168/189

 

Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the best

choice for the statements.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some SS to answer in front of the class.

Task 3 : Answering the questions:

Has the Ss read the reading passage, then

work in pairs to answer the questions:

T goes around class to help them.

T asks the Ss to tell their answer.

Give feedback.

III. After you read:

Ask the Ss to talk about New York.

Asks them to answer the questions:

If you could visit New York, which place(s)

of interest there would you like to see?

Why would you like to see it?

IV. homework: Summarize the reading passage.

Expected answers:

1.  T

2.  F (ice - free)

3.  T

4.  T

5.  T

Read the reading passage, then work in pairs

to answer the questions

Expected answers:

1.  In the Southern part of New York

state.

2.  7 million in the city and 19 million in

the whole metropolitan region.

3.  Because it was found by the Dutch in1624.

4.  Because it is the home of United

Nations, the centre of global finance,

communication and business.

5.  The Statue of Liberty, the Empire

State Building, Wall Street, the

Broadway theatre district are attracted

to visitors.

Discuss the answer:

* I would like to see the Statue ofLiberty.

Because it is the symbol of The USA

* I would like to see the Empire State

Building

Because it is the first highest building in

the world.

I would like to see the Wall Street

Because it is the centre of the world’s

finance

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.

Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

Unit 15 cities 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 169: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 169/189

Page 170: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 170/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the best

choice for the statements.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some SS to answer in front of the class.

Task 3 : Answering the questions:

Has the Ss read the reading passage, then

work in pairs to answer the questions:

T goes around class to help them.

T asks the Ss to tell their answer.

Give feedback.

After you read:

Ask the Ss to talk about New York.

Asks them to answer the questions:

If you could visit New York, which place(s)

of interest there would you like to see?Why would you like to see it?

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

Expected answers:

1.  T

2.  F (ice - free)

3.  T

4.  T5.  T

Read the reading passage, then work in pairs

to answer the questions

Expected answers:

1.  In the Southern part of New York

state.

2.  7 million in the city and 19 million in

the whole metropolitan region.3.  Because it was found by the Dutch in

1624.

4.  Because it is the home of United

Nations, the centre of global finance,

communication and business.

5.  The Statue of Liberty, the Empire

State Building, Wall Street, the

Broadway theatre district are attracted

to visitors.

6. Discuss the answer:

* I would like to see the Statue of

Liberty.

Because it is the symbol of The USA

* I would like to see the Empire State

Building

Because it is the first highest building in

the world.

I would like to see the Wall Street

Because it is the centre of the world’s

finance

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.

Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 171: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 171/189

UNIT 15 CITIES

Period 92 : Speaking Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to compare two

cities and state preferences and giving reasons.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UP

Asks Ss to close their books and tell some

main information about New York

T leads in new lesson: Speaking

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: Completing the sentences

Asks s to look at the book and work with

their partner.Complete the missing words,

using the given in column B

Asks some pairs to tell their answer.

Give feedback.

Task 2: Group work1. T asks some pairs to read aloud the

dialogue model.

T asks Ss to work in pairs.

The T asks the Ss to look at the column of

the two cities and use the information to

make diologue about them.

Goes around the class to gelp the Ss and

asks some pairs to tell their diologues in

front of the class.

Founded in 1624

People are friendly and open

Transport is convenient

Area is 946 square km.

Population is 7 million and total is 19

million.

Look at the column and complete the

sentences

Expected answers:

1.  founded

2.  transport

3.  people

4.  park

5.  population

6.  areaLook at the column.

Work in pairs to make dialogue about New

York and London, using the questions in

task 1 .

A.  When was New York founed?

B.  It was founded in 1624

A.  And what about London?

B.  It was founded in 43 AD

A.  What is the population of New

York?B.  It is 7 million people. And what

about the population of London?

A.  It is 7 million, too.

B.  What is the area of New York?

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 172: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 172/189

 

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Task 3: Telling about the cities, using

comparisons:

Asks the Ss to read the example, then use theinformation in their diologues to tell about

the two cities, using comparisons.

Notes: Comparisons:

Comparative form: short adj + er

More + long adj

More + noun

Possitive form: as + adj + as

Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

T asks some pairs to tell their work in frontof the class.

Task 4: Telling about the cities you like 

Asks the Ss to tell about which of the two

cities they like more and give the reason of

their ideas.Notes:

The structure to use:

I prefer ……. To……..

Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

T asks some pairs to tell their work in front

of the class.

Summary: Speaking practice

III. HOMEWORK: 

Write task 4 in your notebook

Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the

sentences in listening lesson.

A.  It is 946 square km. And what about

London?..............

Ss listen to the teacher.Read the example

Ss work in groups.

Ss make similar dialogues using the

information in their diologues.

1.  Tell about National holidays

A.  London has 14 national days, and

New York has 7 national days

B.  Yes. So London has more national

days than New York

( New York has less national daysthan London)

2.  Tell about parks

A.  London has 5 big parks.

B.  Yes. And New York has only one big

parks, so London has more parks than

New York

3.  tell about people

A. The people in New York are friendly

and open

B.  And the people in London areformal but they are more reversed.

Tell about the city they like more

I prefer London to New York because it has

less population

I prefer New York to London because it is

modern

I prefer New York to London because it has

more high building.

Write homework

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 173: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 173/189

UNIT 15 CITIES 

Period 93 : Listening Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and

understand the information about Pele, one of the most talanted fooballer in the world, fillin the chart and answer the questions about him

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UPT asks s to close the book and work in pairs

to name some famous places in New York.

T calls Ss to answer.

T lead-in listening lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

Before you listen:T asks s to open the book, work in group,

look at the picture and answer the

questions.

T gives questions and asks s to answer.

2. While you listen:

Task 1: Choosing the best andswerT asks the Ss to read the given information

carefully.

Has the Ss to listen to the tapes

T asks s to listen to the first timeT checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

Ss work in pairs.

Empire State Building

The Statue of Liberty

The Home of UN

The Times Square

Look at the picture, work in group and

asnwer the questions

Expected answers:

1. It is the Statue of Liberty.

2. It is the statue of a woman

It is tall / big / beautiful

3. It’ s got a crown on its head

4. It ‘s got a tablet on its left hand5. It is holding a burning torch in its right

hand

It is wearing a robe

Listen to the tape

Choose the best answer

Say their answer in front of the class.

Expected answers:

1.  b

2.  2. a3.  3. a

4.  4. a

5.  5. c

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 174: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 174/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.

Task 2: Filling the table

T gives situations and explains

T asks Ss to look at the tableHas the Ss to listen to complete it.

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

Has the Ss to compare their answer with ther

friend’s answers.

The T asks some Ss to go to the blackboardto write their answers

Gives feedback.

3.  After you listen :

T T asks Ss to to work in groups to discuss

and tell about the Statue of Liberty.

Summary:

Listening about the Statue of Liberty.

III. HOMEWORK: Listening about the Statue of Liberty.

Prepare for new lesson:

Check the answers

Read the table to find out what they have to

do.

Listen to the tapes

Complete the table

Expected answers:1.  46 m

2.  205 tons

3.  cooper and iron frame

4.  stone and concrete

5.  9.30 to 5p.m daily except

Christmas Day

Work in groups to compare the table.

Ss compare their answer with the classmate.

Correct their answers

Group work:

Discuss and tell about the Statue of Liberty.

Where is the Statue of Liberty?

When was it made?How is it?

Expected answer:

The Statue of Liberty is in New York

harbour. It was made by French in 1886 to

show their friendship with America. It is the

Statue of a woman who wears a robe and a

crown on her head. She hols a burning tourch

in her right hand and a table in her left hand.

Listening skill

Writing: Read the given information and

prepare for writing.

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 175: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 175/189

UNIT 15 CITIES

Period 94 : Writing Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to use the

suggestions to write a description of a city or town in Viet nam

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Asks the Ss to work in group and match

the capital cities with the countries 

II. PRESENTATION

Task1: Answer the questionsRead the passage and answer the questions.

T asks s to read the anouncement in their

book and answer the questions.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks the Ss to answer in front of the class.Correct information.

Notes:To write adescription ( of a city), there are

some main information to pay attention to.

Ask the Ss to look at the passage and give

their answers:

Site

Area ............

Listen to the Teacher

Work in group to combine.

Russia – Moscow

France – Paris

China – PekingThe USA – Washington

Italy – Roma

Austria – Viena

Great Britain – London

Read the passage in their book and answer

the questions.

Expected answers:1.  In Suothern England, on the

Thames River.

2.  1610 square km

3.  7 million

4.  The Capital of UK

5.  By the Romans in 43AD

Discuss and give answer to the T’s

Questions

To be situated …

Cover an area of ……

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 176: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 176/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Foudation

Fame

The Teacher makes question and asks the

Ss to answer them:

What city do you want to write about?

When was it found?

What is its population?Where is it situated?

What is its are?

What is it famous for?

Task 2: Write about a city .

1.  Reading given information

2.  The T asks the Ss to read the

information and answer the

questions

Asks the Ss to work in group.

T goes around the class to help themT calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to

write their letter on the board.

2. Writing

The T asks the Ss to work in group write

their announcements

Goes around the class to check and help

them to write correctly.

Asks two groups to write their writing on

the blackboard.

After you write:Ask Ss to exchange their writing to the

other groups to read and correct mistakes.

T chooses 2 writing posters to correct to

the class.

T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes and

gives marks

Summary: Write an announcement.

III. HOMEWORK: Write about the match between your

school football team and the New Stars

team

Prepare for new lesson: Language focus.

Be founded in / by……….

Be famous for …………..

Ss work in groups, answer the teacher’s

questions:

Da Lat

It was found by Yersin in 1807191644 people

Lam Vien Highland

39106 square km

It is famous for history buildings, natural

landscapes, weather…

Groupwork:

Discuss and Write a description about Da Lat.

Expected writing:Da Lat, which is the tourist city of Viet nam,

was founded by Yersin in 1807. It has a

population of 191644 people. It situated on lam

Vien Highland, and it covers the area of 39106

square km. Da Lat is famous for beautiful

natural landscapes such as Valley of Love,

Than Tho Lake, Langbian Mountain… It is also

famous for the weather. The weather is cool

round the year. Every visitors from places in

Viet nam and in the world come to enjoy itsbeautiful scences and weather.

Exchange writng with each others

Correct the friends’ writing

Write homework in the notebooks

Prepare for new lesson: Language focus

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 177: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 177/189

Page 178: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 178/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T calls some Ss to read that sentences.

T corrects pronunciation.

2. Grammar

1. Non-defining and defining relative

clauses:The T asks the Ss to look at the examples

What structures are used?Why is there commars between the two

sentences?

Non-defining relative clauses:

- Proper Nouns

- Possessive adjective

- This / that

- Superilative comparison

Exercise1:

Asks s to use the correct tense of the given

words to complete the spacesGoes around the class to help the Ss

Checks and gives correct answers.

2.Contrsting connecting ideas: AlthoughThe T gives example

Have the Ss to describe anylize it

Exercise2.

Asks s to combine the sentence Goes

around class to help if possible.

Checks and gives correct answers.

Summary:Grammar:

The use of non-defining relative clause and

defining clause.

Although as a contrasting connetor.

III. HOMEWORK: Write the exercises in the notebooks.

Prepare for new lesson: Un 16, reading

Do as teacher request.

Work in group and discuss.

Expected answers:Relative clause

Proper Noun

Look at the exercise, work in pair to

complete the spaces

Expected answers:

1.Washington DC, which is located in the

East Coast of the USA, has many interestingand historical places to visit

2.Mexico City, which has a population of

20,000,000 people, is the largest

metropolictan in the world

3. Seoul, which ….Olympics, is well known

for its shopping.

Although + clause

= inspite of/ despite

Expected answers:1. Although there is not much to do in the

countryside, I prefer living in it.

2. Although there is a lot of population in

Los Angeles, it is an ideal place to live.

3. Although the shops are crowded, people

are not buying much.

4. Although the city is a famous destination,

it has its problems.

5. Although it is a safe neighbour, it is best

to be careful

Repeat main structure.

Prepare for test

UNIT 15 CITIES

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 179: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 179/189

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES

Period 96 : Reading Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary and

expressions in context about Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam, decide True or False statements.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Asks the Ss to work in groups and name

some famous historical places in Ha

Noi.

II. PRESENTATION

Before you read:The T shows some pictures

Ask Ss to work in groups, look at the

picture, read the names of the answer the

questions

Vocabulary:

Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then show

the new words.

Explain new words:

Present (v)

Presentative(adj)Memorialize (v) -> memory

engrave(v)

stelae(n)

witnessed

Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus and

individually.

While you read:

Task 1: Finding the synonyms

Lets the Ss work in pairs, read the words insentences and find the synonyms for them.

Goes around to help the Ss

Ask the Ss tell their answers

Answers the teacher’s questions:

Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam

Ho Guom

Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum

……………………

Match the names with the placesExpected answers:

1 banyan

2 confusius

3 a tortoise

4 a comer in royal examination

Take notes and read the new words.

Pairwork:

Read the sentences, them find the

synonymsCompare the answers with friends.

Expected answers:

a. initially

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 180: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 180/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Gives feedback

Corrects the mistakes

Task 2: T or F statements:

Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs.

Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the best

choice for the statements.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some SS to answer in front of the class.

After you read:Ask the Ss to talk about Van Mieu Quoc Tu

Giam

Pairwork: Ask and answer

Ex: Why is Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam a place

of interest?

Because it is a famous historical and cultural

place. It was arepresentive of Confucial way

of thought and behavior.

Has the Ss to practice in pairs. 

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

Asks some pairs to answer in front of the

class.

Give feedback

Has the Ss to summarize the reading passage.

III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.

b. typical

c. honor

d. carved

e. grow well

Scan the text, then work in pair to decide T

or F.Expected answers:

1.  F in 1076

2.  T

3.  F 11-> 18 century

4.  F well preserved

5.  T

6.  T

Read the reading passage, then work in pairsto answer the questions

1.

2. In 1076 in Ly Dinastry, Ha Noi.

3. Educating talanted men and memorilizing

the most brilliant scholar.

4. Name, the place of birth and the

achievement of the first comers in the Royal

examination

Summarize the reading passage

Summarize the reading passage in notebook.

Prepare for new lesson: Speaking

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 181: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 181/189

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES 

Period 92 : Speaking Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to compare two

cities and state preferences and giving reasons.

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.WARM UP

Asks Ss to close their books and tell some

main information about New York

T leads in new lesson: Speaking

II. PRESENTATION

Task 1: Completing the sentences

Asks s to look at the book and work with

their partner.Complete the missing words,

using the given in column B

Asks some pairs to tell their answer.

Give feedback.

Task 2: Group work1. T asks some pairs to read aloud the

dialogue model.

T asks Ss to work in pairs.

The T asks the Ss to look at the column of

the two cities and use the information to

make diologue about them.

Goes around the class to gelp the Ss and

asks some pairs to tell their diologues in

front of the class.

Founded in 1624

People are friendly and open

Transport is convenient

Area is 946 square km.

Population is 7 million and total is 19

million.

Look at the column and complete the

sentences.

Expected answers:

1.  founded

2.  transport

3.  people

4.  park

5.  population6.  area

Look at the column.

Work in pairs to make dialogue about New

York and London, using the questions in

task 1 .

A.  When was New York founed?

B.  It was founded in 1624

A.  And what about London?

B.  It was founded in 43 AD

A.  What is the population of NewYork?

B.  It is 7 million people. And what

about the population of London?

A.  It is 7 million, too.

B.  What is the area of New York?

C. UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES 

Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 182: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 182/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Task 3: Telling about the cities, using

comparisons:Asks the Ss to read the example, then use the

information in their diologues to tell aboutthe two cities, using comparisons.

Notes: Comparisons:

Comparative form: short adj + er

More + long adj

More + noun

Possitive form: as + adj + as

Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

T asks some pairs to tell their work in frontof the class.

Task 4: Telling about the cities you like 

Asks the Ss to tell about which of the two

cities they like more and give the reason of

their ideas.

Notes:

The structure to use:

I prefer ……. To……..

Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.

Goes around the class to help the Ss.

T asks some pairs to tell their work in front

of the class.

Summary: Speaking practice

III. HOMEWORK:  Write task 4 in your

notebook

Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the

sentences in listening lesson.

A.  It is 946 square km. And what about

London?..............

Ss listen to the teacher.

Read the exampleSs work in groups.

Ss make similar dialogues using the

information in their diologues.

1.  Tell about National holidays

A.  London has 14 national days, and

New York has 7 national days

B.  Yes. So London has more national

days than New York

( New York has less national days

than London)2.  Tell about parks

A.  London has 5 big parks.

B.  Yes. And New York has only one big

parks, so London has more parks than

New York

3.  tell about people

A. The people in New York are friendly

and open

B.  And the people in London are

formal but they are more reversed.

Tell about the city they like more

I prefer London to New York because it has

less population

I prefer New York to London because it is

modern

I prefer New York to London because it has

more high building.

Write homework

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 183: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 183/189

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES 

Period 93 : Listening Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:

By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and

understand the information about Pele, one of the most talanted fooballer in the world, fill

in the chart and answer the questions about him

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I. WARM UPT asks s to close the book and work in pairs

to name some famous places in New York.

T calls Ss to answer.T lead-in listening lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

Before you listen:

T asks s to open the book, work in group,

look at the picture and answer the

questions.

T gives questions and asks s to answer.

2. While you listen:

Task 1: Choosing the best andswer

T asks the Ss to read the given information

carefully.

Has the Ss to listen to the tapes

T asks s to listen to the first time

T checks Ss’ answer.T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

Ss work in pairs.

Empire State Building

The Statue of Liberty

The Home of UNThe Times Square

Look at the picture, work in group and

asnwer the questions

Expected answers:

1. It is the Statue of Liberty.

2. It is the statue of a woman

It is tall / big / beautiful

3. It’ s got a crown on its head4. It ‘s got a tablet on its left hand

5. It is holding a burning torch in its right

hand

It is wearing a robe

Listen to the tape

Choose the best answer

Say their answer in front of the class.

Expected answers:

1.  b2.  2. a

3.  3. a

4.  4. a

5.  5. c

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 184: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 184/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.

Task 2: Filling the table

T gives situations and explains

T asks Ss to look at the tableHas the Ss to listen to complete it.

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the second time

T checks Ss’ answer.

T asks Ss to listen to the third time

Has the Ss to compare their answer with ther

friend’s answers.

The T asks some Ss to go to the blackboardto write their answers

Gives feedback.

3.  After you listen :

T T asks Ss to to work in groups to discuss

and tell about the Statue of Liberty.

Summary:

Listening about the Statue of Liberty.

III. HOMEWORK: Listening about the Statue of Liberty.

Prepare for new lesson:

Check the answers

Read the table to find out what they have to

do.

Listen to the tapes

Complete the table

Expected answers:

1.  46 m

2.  205 tons

3.  cooper and iron frame

4.  stone and concrete

5.  9.30 to 5p.m daily except

Christmas Day

Work in groups to compare the table.

Ss compare their answer with the classmate.

Correct their answers

Group work:

Discuss and tell about the Statue of Liberty.

Where is the Statue of Liberty?

Why was it made?

How is it?

Expected answer:

The Statue of Liberty is in New York

harbour. It was made by French in 1886 to

show their friendship with America. It is the

Statue of a woman who wears a robe and a

crown on her head. She hols a burning tourch

in her right hand and a table in her left hand.

Listening skill

Writing: Read the given information and

prepare for writing.

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 185: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 185/189

Page 186: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 186/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

Foudation

Fame

The Teacher makes question and asks the

Ss to answer them:

What city do you want to write about?

When was it found?

What is its population?Where is it situated?

What is its are?

What is it famous for?

Task 2: Write about a city .1.  Reading given information

2.  The T asks the Ss to read the

information and answer the

questions.

Asks the Ss to work in group.

T goes around the class to help them

T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to

write their letter on the board.

2. Writing

The T asks the Ss to work in group write

their announcements

Goes around the class to check and help

them to write correctly.Asks two groups to write their writing on

the blackboard.

After you write:

Ask Ss to exchange their writing to the

other groups to read and correct mistakes.

T chooses 2 writing posters to correct to

the class.

T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes and

gives marks

Summary: Write an announcement.

III. HOMEWORK:  Write about the

match between your school football team

and the New Stars team

Prepare for new lesson: Language focus.

Be founded in / by……….

Be famous for …………..

Ss work in groups, answer the teacher’s

questions:

Da Lat

It was found by Yersin in 1807191644 people

Lam Vien Highland

39106 square km

It is famous for history buildings, natural

landscapes, weather…

Groupwork:

Discuss and Write a description about Da Lat.

Expected writing:Da Lat, which is the tourist city of Viet nam,

was founded by Yersin in 1807. It has a

population of 191644 people. It situated on lam

Vien Highland, and it covers the area of 39106

square km. Da Lat is famous for beautiful

natural landscapes such as Valley of Love,

Than Tho Lake, Langbian Mountain… It is also

famous for the weather. The weather is cool

round the year. Every visitors from places in

Viet nam and in the world come to enjoy itsbeautiful scences and weather.

Exchange writng with each others

Correct the friends’ writing

Write homework in the notebooks

Prepare for new lesson: Language focus

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 187: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 187/189

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES 

Period 95 : Language focus Date: ...........................

A. OBJECTIVE:Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able torecognize,

understand and pronounce two sounds:/ / and / /, review the use of non-defining and

defining relative clause and althoughas a contrasting connector

B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.

C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.

D. PROCEDURE:

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

I.  WARM UP

Listen to the T and put the words in correct

group:

Mother father this brother thinThan thing thick

Lead to new lesson.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Pronunciation

T presents 2 sounds / /, / /

1. Has th Ss open their books

Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to two

consonants / / and / /.

Asks them to repeat

Asks some Ss to read

corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly

between / / and / /.

2. Lets them work in pair and practice six

sentences in the book.

Help s read them correctly word by word and

then read the whole sentence.

3. Practice these sentences.

T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words

containing the sound / /, / /

S listen to the T and answer.

Mother thin

Father thickBrother thing

Than

this

The sounds / / and / /

Listen to the tape and repeat.

Stand up and read.

Pay attention to the teacher

Ss work in pairs

Practice all those sentencesRead word by word and then read whole

sentence.

S listen and repeat the words

Pick out them

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 188: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 188/189

TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES

T calls some Ss to read that sentences.

T corrects pronunciation.

2. Grammar

1. Non-defining and defining relative

clauses:The T asks the Ss to look at the examples

What structures are used?Why is there commars between the two

sentences?

Non-defining relative clauses:

- Proper Nouns

- Possessive adjective

- This / that

- Superilative comparison

Exercise1:

Asks s to use the correct tense of the given

words to complete the spacesGoes around the class to help the Ss

Checks and gives correct answers.

2.Contrsting connecting ideas: AlthoughThe T gives example

Have the Ss to describe anylize it

Exercise2.

Asks s to combine the sentence Goes

around class to help if possible.

Checks and gives correct answers.

Summary:Grammar:

The use of non-defining relative clause and

defining clause.

Although as a contrasting connetor.

III. HOMEWORK: Write the exercises in the notebooks.

Prepare for new lesson: Un 16, reading

Do as teacher request.

Work in group and discuss.

Expected answers:Relative clause

Proper Noun

Look at the exercise, work in pair to

complete the spaces

Expected answers:

1.Washington DC, which is located in the

East Coast of the USA, has many interestingand historical places to visit

2.Mexico City, which has a population of

20,000,000 people, is the largest

metropolictan in the world

3. Seoul, which ….Olympics, is well known

for its shopping.

Although + clause

= inspite of/ despite

Expected answers:1. Although there is not much to do in the

countryside, I prefer living in it.

2. Although there is a lot of population in

Los Angeles, it is an ideal place to live.

3. Although the shops are crowded, people

are not buying much.

4. Although the city is a famous destination,

it has its problems.

5. Although it is a safe neighbour, it is best

to be careful

Repeat main structure.

Prepare for test

UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com

Page 189: Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 189/189

 

www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com